JP2012135547A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine allowing a player to continuously have a desire to participate in a game.SOLUTION: For winning "a big prize," one of "no rock-paper-scissors rendering and rock-paper-scissors rendering A-E" is carried out in a variable display on a third symbol display device 81, and details how the big prize is won this time are notified according to the classification of rock-paper-scissors rendering carried out in this case. The player can thereby obtain the details how "the big prize" is won this time from the classification of rock-paper-scissors rendering. Consequently, even if the player has a doubt about the details how"the big prize" is won, the doubt can be eliminated. The player can thereby be restrained from continuously feeling displeased about not relieving the doubt, and a decline in the player's desire to participate in the game can be restrained. As a result, the player can continuously have the desire to participate in the game.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a jackpot lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start gate, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the display screen, or the lottery result is notified by sound or a lamp. Pachinko machines are known. Such pachinko machines are provided with a low-probability state with a low probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery and a high-probability state with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low-probability state. Either game state is set. In addition, as a lottery result of the jackpot lottery, for example, a probable jackpot, a normal jackpot, and a miss are provided, and when the jackpot lottery is won, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a promising big hit, the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the jackpot effect ends, and if the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the gaming state is set to a low probability state after the jackpot effect ends. Is done. In pachinko machines, the gaming state changes according to the lottery result, but the lottery result is indicated by effects such as fluctuating effects and jackpot effects, so the player can pay attention to effects such as fluctuating effects and specific effects. , You can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine.

  In this type of pachinko machine, in addition to the lottery results described above, for example, winning hits and small hits, and varying effects and winning effects corresponding to the hits (hereinafter referred to as “specific effects”) The game has been enhanced by increasing the chances of winning and directing patterns. With such a pachinko machine, if a lottery lottery is performed, if the lottery result is the same as the conventional one (that is, a probable big hit, a normal jackpot, or a miss), the variation according to the lottery result will continue as before. An effect and a jackpot effect are performed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player according to the lottery result. However, if the lottery result is a win or small hit, regardless of the lottery result, the predetermined game value is not given to the player, and the same variation effect and specific effect are also given. Done. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a winning hit, the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the end of the specific effect, and if the lottery result is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained.

  In this way, in such a pachinko machine, when the lottery result is a winning or small hit, the same variation effect and specific effect are performed, so the player pays attention to the effect such as the variation effect and the specific effect. Even so, it becomes difficult to distinguish the lottery results, and it becomes unclear whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine has changed. Once the game state is unknown, the player will then play a pachinko machine until the lottery result is a promising big hit or a normal big hit, and the lottery result is indicated by an effect such as a fluctuating effect or a jackpot effect. It becomes impossible to grasp the game state of.

JP 11-333089 A

  However, even if the lottery result is a promising big hit or a normal big hit, and the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the player will not I can't figure it out. Therefore, even if the lottery result is a promising big hit or a normal big win and a predetermined game value is given, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable that the process of the win is unknown. If the player is questioned, the player continues the game without the question being resolved, and thereafter the player continues to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continuously have a willingness to participate in a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a display unit for displaying identification information, a lottery unit for performing lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit. The lottery comprises: an aspect selection unit that selects an aspect of an effect including an aspect of dynamic display of the identification information; and an effect control unit that performs control so that the effect of the aspect selected by the aspect selection unit is executed. When at least first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery result of the means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, The first opening control means for opening the entrance where it is difficult to enter the game medium for a first period, and the entrance when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results The above When the second opening control means that opens for a second period shorter than one period and the lottery result of the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, it is difficult for the game medium to enter the entrance. An entrance maintaining means for maintaining, a game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to a player when a game medium enters the entrance, and a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means The first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery by the lottery means when it is any of the third lottery results is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine Probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means when the lottery result of the lottery by the first gaming state setting means and the lottery means is the second lottery result But The second gaming state setting means for setting the second gaming state lower than the first gaming state as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth lottery results In any case, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, the lottery that stores at least that fact When the lottery result of the lottery by the result storage means and the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results, the mode selection means selects the lottery result according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. And a mode switching means for switching the mode.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein, among the lotteries made by the lottery means, the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result. Counting means for counting the number of times, the lottery result storage means stores the number of times counted by the counting means, and the mode switching means is configured such that the lottery result of the lottery means is the first lottery result. Or, when the result of the second lottery is reached, whether the number counted by the counting means is 1 or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state Determining means for determining whether the number of times is not less than 1 and not more than a predetermined number, and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state. The embodiment is selected in section, embodiments are selected in accordance with a lottery result of the lottery by the selecting means, and a mode is switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is to switch to a different aspect.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the lottery means performs the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, the aspect of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means is the lottery. It is selected by the aspect selection means according to the result, and the effect control means controls so that the effect of the selected aspect is executed. When at least first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, When the entrance difficult to enter is opened by the first opening control means for the first period and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results, the entrance is the second opening control means. Thus, the second period shorter than the first period is opened. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means so that the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given to the game value by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, the first that has a high probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third lottery in the lottery means The second gaming state in which the probability that the result is selected is lower than the first gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery results of the lottery by the lottery means are the fourth and fifth lottery results. When the result is one of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that fact is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first and second lottery results. In any case, the mode switching unit switches the mode selected by the mode selection unit according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for the second period, so that it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result, then the player will have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the gaming machine and the details of the lottery are unknown There is a risk of becoming. According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results. And when the lottery result of the lottery means does not become the third lottery result, and then the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results, The mode selected by the mode selection unit can be switched by the mode switching unit. Therefore, even if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the player is discomforted about the fact that the subsequent lottery process has become unclear, Can be made to grasp. Therefore, since the player can be made aware of the background of the lottery that has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, there exists an effect that a player can have the willingness to participate in a game continuously.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, among the lotteries made by the lottery means, the number of lotteries made after the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the number of lotteries counted is the lottery result. Stored in the storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery means is either the first or second lottery result, the number counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine Is determined in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the mode selected by the mode switching means is determined by the determining means whether or not is in the second gaming state, and The mode is switched to a mode different from the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means. Become. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change. Therefore, the first or second lottery result is not easily selected in the lottery means. Therefore, after the fourth lottery result is reached, the first or second lottery result is selected within a predetermined number of times without changing to the third lottery result and in the second gaming state. The probability is low. According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the lottery result that is difficult to recognize, the first or second lottery result is selected in a state where the probability that the first or second lottery result is selected is considerably low. The player can be made aware of this. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the details of the lottery that has become unknown. In addition, it is possible to give the player a surprise that the first or second lottery result has been selected in a very low probability and a satisfaction that the player has been lucky. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have more willingness to participate in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters and various reserved ball storage areas. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol jackpot type table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol small hit table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number table per normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the game state flag. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the special symbol lottery result storage area. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the production pattern table. It is the table | surface which showed an example of the content of janken production. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special effect completion | finish determination table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special effect resumption determination table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect performed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a hit or a small hit. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect performed when the lottery result of a special symbol becomes a probable big hit or a normal big win after a specific production is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous notice determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop type command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fanfare command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case the variable display is performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special effect setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the lottery result log | history storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the change display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen of the fluctuation | variation display performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, A ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 67 (through gate), a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is omitted for easy understanding of the reference numerals.

  The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, is disposed in the central portion of the game area, and a first entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display device unit 80. . When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol (first symbol), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  On the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, one second entrance 67 through which a sphere can pass is provided. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The control device 110 draws a normal symbol (second symbol), and the second symbol display device 83 displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Since the second entrance 67 is not a prize entrance, no prize ball is paid out even if the ball passes.

  In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big winner, The type is also determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit.

  In the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When it hits the normal symbol, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, once for 0.2 seconds or twice for 1 second), It becomes a state where a ball easily enters the 1 entrance 64. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In this pachinko machine 10, there are three types of special symbol jackpot types: “15R probability variation jackpot for special symbol”, “15R regular jackpot for special symbol”, and “hit jackpot for special symbol”. A game value (game value) is given to the player according to the type.

  “Special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” means that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the big round of 15 rounds (first special game state) and the first special game state is ended. It is a jackpot that the state shifts to a “high probability state of special symbol”. “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” means that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot (first special game state) of 15 rounds and the first special game state is ended. While the state shifts to a “special symbol low probability state”, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a big hit that becomes a “normal symbol time-short state” to be described later. Details of the first special game state will be described later.

  In addition, the “special winning pattern hit” is a transition to a hit (second special game state) different from the above 15 round big hit (first special game state), and the second special game state ends. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is about to shift to the “high probability state of special symbol”. Details of the second special game state will be described later. In the present embodiment, the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is configured to be very short compared to the period in which the gaming state is in the first special gaming state. Therefore, the “special symbol sudden hit” has a smaller gaming value (game value) than the “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” and “special symbol 15R normal jackpot”.

  In addition, “special symbol small hit” is not a special symbol big hit, but a bonus provided separately. When this “special symbol small hit” is reached, the second special game described above. Although the state is shifted to the state, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changed (maintained) even when the second special gaming state ends. Further, “exclusion of special symbol” indicates that none of the jackpots or hits has occurred, and in the case of “exclusion of special symbol”, the above-mentioned first special gaming state or The second special game state is not entered, and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changed (maintained). In the present embodiment, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, effects according to the lottery result are displayed on the lighting units 29 to 33, the third symbol display device 81, an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, And it is executed in the lamp display device 227 or the like. Details of this effect will be described later.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the probability of jacking up a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “probability change state of a special symbol (during special symbol change)”, in other words, a 15-round jackpot It is a game state that can easily shift to (first special game state). In the present embodiment, both the “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” and the “special symbol sudden probability jackpot” both move to the “high probability state of the special symbol”, but in the case of “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot”. Furthermore, the game is in a game state where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64 ("normal symbol time-short state" described later). On the other hand, in the case of “a special symbol hit”, the process only shifts to a “special symbol high probability state”.

  Hereinafter, the “high probability state of a special symbol” that shifts by becoming a “15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol” will be referred to as a “high probability state A of a special symbol” and become a “probable hit of a special symbol” The “special symbol high probability state B” to be transferred is referred to as “special symbol high probability state B”. When both the “high probability state A of a special symbol” and the “high probability state B of a special symbol” are indicated, they are simply described as “a high probability state of a special symbol”.

  On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. It is a state (a normal state of a special symbol). In addition, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the middle of winning the special symbol, the special symbol lottery is not performed, but the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “low probability state of the special symbol”.

  The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the normal symbol hit probability is lower than the normal symbol short time. Is a low state. The normal symbol lottery is performed regardless of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special game state or the second special game state.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a lottery result of special symbols. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big win, the big hit type (special symbol 15R probability variation big hit, special symbol) The special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the 15R normal jackpot and the special symbol hit probability) is shown. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a special symbol small hit, it is indicated that the special symbol is a small bonus. Note that the special symbol indicating the special symbol hit and the special symbol indicating the special symbol small hit are similar to each other and are configured so that the player cannot easily recognize them. The reason why the player makes it difficult to recognize special symbols will be described later.

  As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 83 varies depending on whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67 is being executed, depending on the lighting state. A normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after display or after the end of the fluctuation.

  When the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result The normal symbol indicating is stopped and displayed.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. When the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 causes the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 to be in a predetermined opening period. (In the present embodiment, it is activated (opened) only once for 0.2 seconds or twice for 1 second), and as a result, the ball enters the first entrance 64 easily. It is configured. The details of the opening period of the electric accessory will be described later.

  When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. Is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased to “during special symbol change” or “ordinary time of normal symbol”. Instead of changing the probability, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol”, it is attached to the first entrance 64. It may be configured to change the opening time of the electric combination (not shown) to be performed or the number of opening of the electric combination accompanying one normal symbol hit.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later. Although details will be described later, for example, a predetermined rear image is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the left, middle, and right 3 are displayed on the front of the rear image (overlapped in front). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation big win of special symbol or 15R normal big hit of special symbol”, a predetermined time (variation time) ), The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become the stop symbol indicating the special symbol jackpot type, and the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol jackpot type is displayed as the third symbol. The display on the display device 81 indicates the occurrence of a big hit (first special gaming state) with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot (first special gaming state) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this first special gaming state, the special prize opening 65a that is normally closed is in a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “10 balls enter the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a” and “ It is opened until one of the conditions of “30 seconds have passed since opening” is satisfied.

  The specific winning opening 65a has a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, one condition of “10 balls are awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a”) and “30 seconds have passed since opening”. After the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined opening period. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit or special symbol hit”, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the special symbol hit or hit The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that a stop symbol indicating "." Is displayed, and a stop symbol of the third symbol indicating "remove of special symbol" that causes reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state described above. In the second special game state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “until 0.2 seconds elapses”).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “until 0.2 seconds elapses from opening”), and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is again set to the predetermined winning opening 65a. Opened during the open period. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 15 times. However, in this case, since the opening time of the specific winning opening 65a is short, it is difficult to win a ball into the specific winning opening 65a as in the normal case.

  Hereinafter, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65a when the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation big win of special symbol or 15R normal big hit of special symbol” (that is, the special winning opening 65a in the first special gaming state) Is referred to as “first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a”. In addition, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning port 65a when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning or special symbol small hit” (that is, opening / closing the specific winning port 65a in the second special gaming state) (Operation) is referred to as “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a”.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the main controller 110 draws the normal symbol (second symbol), and when it hits the normal symbol, the predetermined time (fluctuation) After the elapse of time, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays a stop symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”) indicating a normal symbol hit. Then, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined opening period, and as a result, the first entrance 64 is configured to easily enter a ball. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time of the electric accessory is configured to be different depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “normal symbol time-short state” or “normal symbol normal state”. Yes. Specifically, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “ordinary symbol time-short state”, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is continuously released twice, It is opened for 1 second per time. On the other hand, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “normal state of normal symbol”, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released once for 0.2 seconds. . Therefore, in the case of the “normal symbol time-short state”, the ball enters the first entrance 64 more easily than the “normal symbol normal state”. Therefore, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64 and a special symbol lottery is easily performed.

  Further, as described above, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed below the variable display device unit 80, and the first entrance 64 is provided when a sphere enters. It is also one of the winning openings where five balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, if the number of balls entering the first entrance 64 increases due to the short state of the normal symbol, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly. It will be difficult or will not lose the ball. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, the player can obtain a sense of expectation that a jackpot can be obtained in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or in a state where the number of retained balls is not decreased. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  However, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “ordinary symbol short-time state”, the 15th round jackpot (first special gaming state) period is the first entry even if it hits the ordinary symbol. The electric accessory attached to the mouth 64 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds. This is because during the big hit of the 15th round (during the first special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  Hereinafter, except for the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “normal symbol short-time state” and hits the normal symbol. This is referred to as “first opening / closing operation of the electric accessory”. In addition, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state, and the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 hits the normal symbol in the “normal state of the normal symbol”, This is referred to as “second opening / closing operation of the electric accessory”.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, there are provided adhering spaces K1 and K2 for adhering stamps and identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmets, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is “15R probability variation big hit, 15 normal big hit”, the same main Fluctuation display with uniform symbols is performed, and 15 rounds of jackpot (first special game state) are generated after the variation display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation big hit of special symbol”, the main symbol to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added and the variable display is stopped and displayed. Done. Also, if “15R special jackpot of special symbol” is selected, the variable symbols are displayed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol”, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not arranged is performed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, a continuous notice suggesting that there is a high probability that the special symbol will be a big hit. In such a case, when a variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, the main symbol combinations “3” and “3” in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the effective line L1). 4 ”,“ 1 ”), so-called“ chance eyes ”are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol wins” or “special bonuses”, a stop combination is displayed with a predetermined combination of main symbols (for example, “exclusion of special symbol” that causes reach). The variable display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, a back image is displayed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the lottery result of the special symbol. In this embodiment, as the types of back images, “back images for high probability of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as“ back images for high probability ”)” and “back images for short time of normal symbols ( (Hereinafter referred to as "back image for short-time operation"), "back image for special effects", and "back image for low probability of special symbols (hereinafter" back image for low probability ") At least four types, and any one type of back image is set as the back image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The “back image for high probability” is a back image indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol”, and the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation big hit”. After that, when the above-mentioned 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is completed, it is displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, the “back image for time reduction” is a back image indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “ordinary symbol time reduction state” and “special symbol low probability state”. When the symbol lottery result is “15R normal jackpot” and then the above-mentioned 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is completed, the lottery result is displayed in the main display area Dm.

  The “back image for special effects” is a back image indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state B of a special symbol”. The main display will be displayed when the result of the lottery is “A special symbol hit or special symbol hit” and then the second special gaming state described above is finished (when a specific effect described later is finished). It is displayed in the area Dm.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “exclusion of special symbol” in a state where the “back image for special effect” is displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, when the variable display corresponding to the “disappearance of the special symbol” is finished, the “back image for special effect” displayed in the main display area Dm is “the low probability of the special symbol” with a predetermined probability. It is switched (changed) to “back image for time”. However, when the back image displayed in the main display area Dm is switched from “back image for special effects” to “back image for low probability of special symbol”, the lottery result of the special symbol is then displayed. Is changed to “back image for special effect” with a predetermined probability when the display of fluctuation corresponding to the “out of special symbol” is completed.

  The “back image for low probability” is a rear image indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not “normal symbol time-short state” but “special symbol low probability state”. In the case where the “back image for special effects” is displayed in the main display area Dm and the back image is switched to “back image for low probability of special symbols”, the pachinko machine This is a rear image indicating that the ten game states are “a low probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state B of a special symbol”.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. In the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the main display area Dm is superimposed on the front of a predetermined rear image. ), Three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved sphere) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described variable display and stop display of the third symbol, a decorative display accompanying the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Although details will be described later, for example, a display indicating that 15 rounds of jackpot (first special gaming state) are in progress (first jackpot effect), or in a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state Is displayed (specific effect). The specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is “special symbol winning” or “special symbol small hit”.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit or special symbol small hit”, a display different from normal (special effect) is made, and then the main display area Dm displays “ "Back image for special effects" is displayed. In the special performance, there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be in an advantageous state for the player. This is an effect for notifying the player that there is a game.

  In addition, for example, when variable display and stop display and various effects are performed on the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like operate according to the display and various effects. Then, the lamp is lit and flashing, and audio is output.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the sound lamp control device is used for complicated processing such as determination of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 so that the main control device 110 can concentrate on main control related to the game such as special symbol lottery. 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be performed by a sub-control device. When the main control device 110 instructs an operation to a sub control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 transmits various commands to the sub control device. These various commands are transmitted by the data transmission / reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, first symbol display device 37 display setting, second symbol display device 83 display setting, and third symbol display device 81 display setting. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like include special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, first symbol display device 37 display setting, second symbol display device 83 display setting, and third symbol display device 81 display setting. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 32). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas). The respective values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. The In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Hereinafter, each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. The value of the random number that is a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. When it matches the set random number value that is a big jackpot, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a special symbol having a low probability (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability that a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (special symbol). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7,307,582” is a special symbol for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322”. 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. 202a. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In this embodiment, the hit value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability and the hit value stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability are duplicated. Each hit value is set so that it does not become a value. Here, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is a random value that is always used as a winning value, the random value is likely to be predicted from the outside. May be easily received. On the other hand, according to the gaming situation of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol) as in the present embodiment, By changing the random number value, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be a big hit of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type (stop type at the time of big hit) when the special symbol is a big hit. Specifically, determination of the jackpot type is determination of the stop type at the time of jackpot. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 119) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 119 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 119). It is the composition which returns to. That is, the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Thereafter, when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined as the special symbol jackpot. If the random number becomes, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the same timing as the value of the first hit random number counter C1. It becomes an aspect.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if the random number is out of the special symbol, the special random number counter C1 has a special value based on the value of the first random number counter C1. A lottery of symbols is performed. If the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a random number that is a small hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time of the special symbol small hitting time. It will be a thing. In addition, since there is no hit type about the special symbol small hit, the display mode is always the same. In addition, since there is no hit type, there is only one stop type at the time of the small hit and is uniquely determined.

  If the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is neither a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol nor a random number that is a small hit of the special symbol, that is, if the random number is out of the special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  As described above, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 119. The random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, which is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 39” is “15R probability variable big hit of special symbol”. It becomes. Also, the jackpot type when the value is “40 to 59” is “special symbol winning hit”, and the jackpot type when the value is “60 to 119” is “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” " As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has three types of jackpot types (a special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot, a special symbol sudden hit, a special symbol 15R normal) according to the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot) is determined. Specifically, determination of the jackpot type is determination of the stop type at the time of jackpot.

  And since the total number of random numbers that will be “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” is 40 among the total number of random number values, it will be “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” when it is a special symbol jackpot. The probability is “1/3”. Similarly, since the total number of random numbers that are “special symbol hits” is 20, the probability of “special symbol hits” becomes “1/6” when a special symbol jackpot is reached. Since the total number of random numbers that become “15R normal jackpot for special symbol” is 60, the probability of “15R normal jackpot for special symbol” is “1/2” when the special symbol jackpot is reached.

  As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the probability of winning the special symbol is “1/300”. Therefore, when the special symbol has a low probability, the probability of “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” is “2/1800”, the probability of “special symbol hit probability” is “1/1800”, The probability of “15R normal jackpot” is “3/1800”. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, the probability that the special symbol is a big hit is “1/30”. Therefore, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the probability of “15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol” is “2/180”, the probability of “special symbol sudden hit” is “1/180”, “ The probability of “15R normal jackpot” is “3/180”.

  Further, the random value for determining the small hit of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is set by the special symbol small random number table 202c, which is the main control device. 110 ROM 202 is provided. In the present embodiment, the probability of “special symbol small hit” does not change (is constant) regardless of whether the special symbol has a low probability or the special symbol has a high probability.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the first per random number counter C1, four random numbers “0-3” as “special symbol small hits” are provided. The total number of random number values of the first random number counter C1 is 900, and the total number of random number values that are “special symbol small hits” is 4, so the probability of special symbol small hits is “8/1800”. Become.

  As described above, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the probability of becoming a “special symbol hit” is “1/1800”, and the probability of “special symbol small hit” is always “8/1800”. . Accordingly, when the special symbol has a low probability, the probability of “special symbol hit per unit” or “special symbol small hit” is “9/1800”. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, the probability of being “special symbol's winning hit” is “1/180”, and “the probability of being a special symbol's small hit is always“ 8/1800 ”. Therefore, when the special symbol has a high probability, the probability of “special symbol hit per unit” or “special symbol small hit” is “18/1800”.

  In addition, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the stop type selection counter C3 returns to 0. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, the stop type when the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is deselected is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is 1 before and after the reach symbol. A “rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99) that stops by shifting only once, and a “reach other than front / rear out of reach” where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach (for example, a range of 90 to 97) ) And “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and according to the table, the range of random values for each stop type of special symbol outage Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 32). The value of the variation type counter CS <b> 1 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 uses a variation type counter CS1 and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202 to perform so-called short deviation (5 seconds), long deviation (11 seconds), normal reach (20 seconds), super reach (90). Second), special reach (120 seconds), etc. are determined. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the special symbol variation pattern table 202d, a special symbol variation pattern table 202d used when the special symbol is hit and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d used when the special symbol is lost are prepared. Further, as the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for detaching the special symbol, it depends on whether the normal symbol is in the short-time state or the special symbol in the high probability state, or whether the special symbol is in the low probability state excluding the normal symbol in the short-time state. A special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probability change) and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) are prepared.

  When a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1, if the lottery result is "special symbol jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)", special bonus jackpot Based on the symbol variation pattern table 202d and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the same timing as the first random number counter C1, the variation pattern at the time of big hit of the special symbol is determined. Is done. On the other hand, if the lottery result is “special symbol hit, special symbol small hit, special symbol miss”, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol miss and its first random number counter Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the same timing as C1, the variation pattern at the time of detachment of the special symbol is determined.

  For example, there are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach as the variation pattern for the special symbol jackpot. In the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for jackpot, each variation pattern and the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each other in the range of 0 to 10 for the normal reach, 11 to 99 for the super reach, and 100 to 198 for the special reach. It has become. The various types of Nordreach are reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the 1st pattern (or 3rd pattern) is aligned (so-called bita-stopped pattern is aligned). The first pattern (or the third pattern) after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach), etc. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after time reach (for example, a reach that further develops after super reach or a special reach that develops from normal reach different from super reach).

  The variation pattern for the jackpot is selected in the case of a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R regular jackpot), so various special reach types are selected to give the player a sense of expectation. It is easy. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach can be selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  Note that “various reach” means that there are a lot of different contents in each reach. For example, in the super reach, a reach that changes the back image quickly and a certain character is displayed. There is a reach or the like that is displayed suddenly. In addition, there are a plurality of reach with different contents such as an addition of a notice effect before the start of change and an addition of an effect that becomes a big hit by re-change.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of the big hit of the special symbol is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted before and after).

  In addition, for example, as a variation pattern when a special symbol is removed, there are short deviation, long deviation, various types of normal reach, and various types of super reach. Further, for example, there are various types of normal reach and various types of super reach as the variation pattern at the time of hitting a special symbol and the variation pattern at the time of hitting a special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (ordinary) is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol” when the special symbol is in a low probability state except for the short time state of the normal symbol. The In addition, regardless of the short time state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is referred to as “special symbol winning” or “special symbol small hit”.

  The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (normal) includes a complete detachment reference that is referred to when complete detachment is determined as a stop type at the time of detachment of the special symbol, and a reach other than front / rear detachment and front / back detachment Is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type when the special symbol is out of common with the reach that is referred to when the value is determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each of the divided groups Are associated with each other.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol hit per hit" or "special symbol hit per hit", that is, when the hit hit is determined as the stop type at the time of big hit, or When the stop type at the time of small hit is determined, a common reach group (group) is selected from the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal).

  Dedicated to complete deviation includes short deviation in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time and reach is not established, and long deviation that is longer than the short deviation but in which reach is not established, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 The correspondence is 0 to 148 for short out and 149 to 198 for long out. In addition, in the reach common, there are various types of normal reach in which the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short, and various types of super-reach in which the fluctuation time is longer than the normal reach, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is Various types of outlier normal reach are 0 to 148, and various types of outlier super reach are 149 to 198.

  Further, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probability change) indicates that the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol” when the normal symbol is in the short-time state or the special symbol has a high probability state. Referenced. The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probability change) is determined as a stop type when the special symbol is removed, in the same manner as the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal). Categorization into groups (groups) based on the stop types at the time of detachment of a special symbol, which are dedicated to complete detachment referred to in the event of an event, and common reach that is determined when reach other than anteroposterior detachment and anteroposterior detachment is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  Correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. In addition, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to reach is 0 to 148 for various out-of-normal reach and 149 to 198 in various out-of-reach super reach.

  The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probability change) is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change. Is easy to enter. Therefore, if there is a lot of extraordinary time when the normal symbol is in the short time state or the special symbol is in a high probability state, it takes time until the next variable display starts, giving the player a waiting state, May cause discomfort to the person. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when a normal symbol is in a short-time state or a special symbol in a high-probability state, it is configured so that a short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to the person can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  Note that the variation pattern when the special symbol is off is selected using only the variation type counter CS1. However, even if a plurality of variation type counters are selected together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). good. Further, the selection of the special symbol detachment type is divided into a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (normal) and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (probability variation). However, even in the low probability state of the special symbol, if there are a plurality of reserved balls (for example, three or more if the maximum is four), the variation display may be terminated early, so that the special symbol is off. May be selected with reference to the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for use (probability change), or may be configured to prepare a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls. good.

  Further, in the above-described special symbol variation pattern table 202d for detaching each special symbol, when the detachment is selected as the detachment of short and long, and the detachment is selected, the short deviation and the long are referred to by referring to other tables. You may comprise so that it may select with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  As will be described in detail later, when the variation pattern is determined based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, the main control device 110 sends a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern type from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control. Is transmitted to the device 113. When the lottery result is determined based on each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, a stop type command indicating the lottery result is sent to the main control device. 110 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation pattern type indicates the variation time of symbol variation. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the variation pattern command, the third symbol display is synchronized with the variation display and stop display of the first symbol display device 37. The third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the variation display and stop display of the third symbol are performed by the device 81.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that becomes a normal symbol hit is set by the random number table 202e per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the random number table 202e per normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is set in accordance with, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. Further, the random number table 202e per ordinary symbol is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability (ordinary symbol) having a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability. The period of the short time state and the period of the high probability state of the special symbol) are divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is "5-28". These random number values are stored in the random number table 202e for ordinary symbols for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers to be won is 24 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of being a normal symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random numbers are stored in the normal symbol random number table 202e for high probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers to be won is 200 among the total number of random numbers 240, so the probability of being a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the electric accessory to be performed becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is only “twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. Although it is opened, the opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 may be opened “3 seconds × 3 times”.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 32), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes at least a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a game state flag 203e. ing.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. The values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, data corresponding to the passage of the sphere is stored while the order in which the sphere has passed is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area in which data corresponding to the passage of the sphere is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S204 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S404 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 24). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is incremented by one. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 29).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S603 in FIG. 28: No).

  The gaming state flag 203e is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Here, the game state flag 203e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game state flag. The gaming state flag 203e is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the lower 3 bits (bit 0 to bit 2). The other bits (bits 3 to 7) are not used.

  As shown in FIG. 8, when the lower 3 bits are “000”, it indicates that the “special symbol is in a low probability state”, and when the lower 3 bits are “010”, the state is in the “high probability state of a special symbol”. “A”, and when the lower 3 bits are “100”, it indicates “high probability state B of special symbol”. In other words, when the lower 3 bits are “010”, the “special symbol 15R probability variation big hit” results in the “special symbol high probability state A”, and the normal symbol time-short state (the hit probability increases). ). When the lower 3 bits are “100”, the result is “special symbol hit probability”, resulting in “special symbol high probability state B”, and the normal symbol hit probability is in the normal state. Show.

  The game state flag 203e refers to whether the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability mentioned above or the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is referred to when the special symbol lottery is performed. Used by MPU 201 to determine.

  Specifically, if the special symbol lottery is performed when the lower 3 bits of the game state flag 203e are “000”, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is referred to, and the big win lottery is selected. Done. On the other hand, if the low-order 3 bits of the game state flag 203e are “010” or “100” and the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is referred to, and the big win lottery Is done. Although details will be described later, it is also referred to when a lottery result of a special symbol lottery is prefetched.

  The gaming state flag 203e is all set to “0” by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S914 in FIG. 31). When the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “000” (see S414 in FIG. 26). Then, when the special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is “15R probability variation big hit of special symbol”, when the big win is over, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “010” ( (See S1113 in FIG. 33). In addition, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “000” when the big jackpot ends. (See S1114 in FIG. 33).

  Further, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is “special symbol win”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “100” when the specific effect is finished. (See S1208 in FIG. 34). In addition, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is “exclusion of special symbol”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are not changed.

  In this embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is “15R special jackpot of special symbol”, the state of the game state flag 203e is set to “000” when the big jackpot ends. (Refer to S1114 in FIG. 33), but at the start of the jackpot, the lower 3 bits are set to “000”, so when the jackpot ends, the gaming state flag 203e is not set. It may be configured to (do nothing).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed in the main control device 110 and the prefetching command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. . In the present embodiment, as soon as the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the start winning, the big hit of the original special symbol Apart from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1). The prediction of information is described as prefetching a lottery result of a special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When it is predicted whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol will be determined, first, one of the two types of special symbol jackpot random number tables 202a (see FIG. 5) is used for prediction. As in the case of the lottery, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value (winning value) stored in the one table 202a used for prediction, and one of them matches. In addition, it is predicted (determined) that the lottery result is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when predicting a lottery result of a special symbol, if the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are “000”, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability is used to predict the success or failure. Is done. On the other hand, if the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are “010” or “100”, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability is used to predict the success / failure.

  Then, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is successful is predicted. As a result, if it is predicted that the jackpot is won, the jackpot type is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 and the random number stored in the special symbol jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 5), as in the case of the special symbol lottery. And the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, if it is predicted that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the special symbol, it is predicted whether the special symbol is a small hit.

  When it is predicted whether or not the special symbol is a small hit, as in the case of the special symbol lottery, the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the special symbol small hit table 202c. The random number value (win value) is compared. Then, if it is predicted that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit of the special symbol, then the stop type at the time of losing the special symbol is predicted. Even when the stop type at the time of losing the special symbol is predicted, the value of the acquired stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop type selection table (not shown) are stored as in the case of the special symbol jackpot lottery. The stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, when the variation pattern type is predicted, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol variation pattern table 202d, as in the case of the jackpot lottery. The variation pattern type corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, when prefetching is executed in main controller 110, whether or not, its type, and variation pattern type are predicted, a prefetch command including the prediction result is sent from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113. Be notified. In the sound lamp control device 113, when a prefetch command is received, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is to be executed with respect to a series of fluctuating effects held at that time. When it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be performed, the mode of the continuous notice effect is further set.

  Here, the continuous notice effect will be described. The continuous notice effect is a kind of notice effect that suggests (notices) that the lottery result of the special symbol performed with the winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit, Over all (or a part) of the variation effects held at the time of winning the prize, the chance eye is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect. If this continuous notice effect is continuously displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 together with the suspended variation effect, the player is given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all the suspended variation effects have ended. It can be held against.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect over all (or a part) of the variable effects held at the time of winning a prize, chances are displayed in the respective variable effects. The same character or a character related to the same character may be displayed. Moreover, you may display so that the number of the same characters and the number of characters related to the same character may be increased every time each variation effect is performed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the variation effect different from the normal one has been performed, and thus can recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that will be a big hit after all of the variation effects that have been put on hold.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of a continuous notice effect is set for a suspended variation effect, when the variation effect ends in the third symbol display device 81, a chance symbol (for example, a diagram) On the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combinations of main symbols “3”, “4”, “1”) are displayed in order from the left symbol row Z1. Of the series of variation effects for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the last variation effect is not displayed as a chance symbol as a stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  Normally, the player plays a game while paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the chance pattern continuously as a stop symbol that appears after the variation effect is stopped. The player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect has been performed. In addition, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the chances are displayed, so that the player is expected to be a jackpot after the end of the continuous notice effect. You can have it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 receives a start winning, the first per-random number counter C 1, the first per-type counter C 2, and the stop type selection acquired according to the start winning Various information (win / no-go, stop type, change pattern type) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated) from each value of the counter C3 and the change type counter CS1. The predicted various information is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command.

  As will be described in detail later, when the pre-read command is notified, the sound lamp control device 113 receives various information (predicted result of special symbol success / failure result, stop type prediction result, variation pattern type) notified by the pre-read command. Based on the prediction result), information stored in the RAM 223a, and the like, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined and the mode of the continuous notice effect is set. As described above, the main controller 110 obtains various types of information (special symbol success / failure, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start prize from each counter value acquired in accordance with the start prize. ) To predict (estimate), and whether to start the continuous notice effect based on the various information (predicted result of special symbol, predicted result of stop type, predicted result of variation pattern type) Complex processing such as processing for determining whether or not is performed by the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the process in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 113, the execution conditions for the continuous notice effect can be set in various modes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The payout control device 111 is equipped with an MPU 211 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 211 includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuation effects. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display), specific effect, special effect, and continuous notice effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the sound lamp control device is used for complicated processing such as determination of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 so that the main control device 110 can concentrate on main control related to the game such as special symbol lottery. The sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to perform control at 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is equipped with an MPU 221 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 221 includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a special effect end determination table 222a, a special effect restart determination table 222b, an effect pattern table 222c, and a continuous notice determination table 222d. In addition, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a gaming state flag 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a special effect flag 223e, A continuous number counter 223f, a small hit after flag 223g, a small hit after change number counter 223h, a special effect lottery counter 223i, a prefetch information storage area 223j, a continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k, a continuous advance notice number counter 223l, A jackpot flag 223m is provided at least after the advance notice.

  For convenience of explanation, the special effect end determination table 222a and the special effect resumption determination table 222b in the ROM 222 will be described after the special effect lottery counter 223i in the RAM 223 is described. Further, the description of the effect pattern table 222c in the ROM 222 will be given after the description of the continuous probability counter 223f in the RAM 223. The continuous notice determination table 222d in the ROM 222 will be described after the continuous notice lottery counter 223k in the RAM 223 is described.

  The special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is an area in which the special symbol stop type and the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 are stored. As described above, in the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and a stop type command indicating the special symbol lottery result And the fluctuation pattern command which shows the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation effect performed corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, the stop type indicating the lottery result is extracted from the stop type command. Stop types indicating the lottery results include “15R probability big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “crash hit”, “small hit”, “completely missed (missed)”, “front and back missed reach (missed)”, Any one of “reach other than back and forth detachment” is extracted. When a variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern type is extracted. In addition, as a variation pattern type, “special reach (120 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “long out (11 seconds)”, “short out (5 seconds)” Is extracted. The special symbol lottery result storage area 223a stores the stop type extracted from the stop type command and the variation pattern type extracted from the variation pattern command.

  The stop type and the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a are the display control in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output control in the sound output device 226, and the lighting in the lamp display device 227. And used for controlling the turn-off (see FIGS. 36, 40, and 41).

  Although details will be described later, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the stop type and the variation pattern type are stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, the variation effect according to the stop type and the variation pattern type is displayed in the third manner. Control is performed so as to be executed in the symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the variation effect being executed ends, the third symbol display device 81 has a big hit (first) according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. A display (special effect) indicating that the special game state is in progress (a jackpot effect) and a second special game state different from the first special game state on the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Is controlled to

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the currently executed jackpot effect ends or when the currently performed specific effect ends, the third symbol display is performed according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. Control is performed so that the rear image displayed on the device 81 is changed. As described above, in this embodiment, as the types of the back image, “back image for high probability”, “back image for time reduction”, “back image for special effect”, and “low probability” Four types of “back-side image for time” are provided, and any one type of back-side image is set as the back-side image of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, also when the variation | change effect in process is complete | finished, according to the stop classification stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is carried out. There is a case where control is performed so that the rear image being displayed is changed.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effect of the special symbol held in the main controller 110. As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol variation display is incremented by 1 by entering the first entrance 64, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is added. A reserved ball number command indicating a value is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and the RAM 233. Is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1609 in FIG. 38).

  In addition, in the main controller 110, when the variable display of the special symbol is newly started in the first symbol display device 37, the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and further, in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command indicating a variation display mode to be started is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception of the variation pattern command, the special symbol reserved ball count counter in the RAM 233 is set. The value of 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1823 in FIG. 40).

  In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command or the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the symbol holding ball number counter 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls on which the special symbol variation display is reserved.

  The gaming state flag 223c is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured in the same manner as the gaming state flag 203e of the main control device 110. That is, the gaming state flag 223c is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the lower 3 bits (bit 0 to bit 2). The other bits (bits 3 to 7) are not used.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the lower 3 bits are “000”, it indicates “low probability state of special symbol”, and when the lower 3 bits are “010”, “special symbol” High-probability state A ”, and when the lower 3 bits are“ 100 ”, it indicates“ high-probability state B of special symbol ”. In other words, when the lower 3 bits are “010”, the result is “special symbol 15R probability variation big hit”, resulting in “special symbol high probability state”, and the normal symbol time-short state (increased chance of winning) Indicates that Further, when the lower 3 bits are “100”, “special symbol hit probability” results in “special symbol high probability state”, indicating that the normal symbol hit probability is in the normal state. .

  All the bits of the game state flag 223c are set to “0” by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). When the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the jackpot effect ends, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If “15R probability variable jackpot”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming status flag 223c are set to “010” (see S1912 in FIG. 41), and if “15R normal jackpot”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming status flag 223c. Is set to “000” (see S1913 in FIG. 41).

  In addition, when a specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the specific effect ends, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If is a “successful hit”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c are set to “100” (see S1904 in FIG. 41). When the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is “small hit” or “disengagement (complete disengagement, front / rear disengagement reach, reach other than disengagement before / after disengagement)”, the gaming state flag 223c is not changed. .

  Although the details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223c is used to perform display control in the third symbol display device 81, audio output control in the audio output device 226, and lighting on / off control in the lamp display device 227. (See FIGS. 36, 40, and 41).

  The variation start flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not the variation effect should be started in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. When the variation start flag 223d is on, the variation start flag 223d is varied. Indicates that the production should start. On the other hand, in the case of OFF, it indicates that it is not a state in which the changing effect should be started.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command corresponding to the variation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 38), and the variation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is turned off when done (see S1802 in FIG. 40). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. Note that when a variation pattern type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the variation start flag 223d may be set to ON.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The special effect flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. When the special effect flag 223e is on, it indicates that the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and when the special effect flag 223e is off. Indicates that the special effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

  The special effect flag 223e is set to OFF by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the specific effect ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to ON (FIG. 41). S1908). Further, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect ends, the special effect flag 223e is set to OFF (FIG. 41). S1918). In this embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the special effect flag 223e is set to OFF. However, it may be set to OFF at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set off at the start of the jackpot presentation.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 (that is, the special effect flag 223e). When the variation effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the special effect being executed is to be ended (see S1920, S1925, and S1926 in FIG. 41). ). If it is determined that the special effect being executed is to be ended, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to OFF (see S1918 in FIG. 41), and the special effect ends.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special effect being executed is to be ended, if the variable effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the change Each time the effect ends, it is determined whether or not the special effect once ended is resumed (see S1920 to S1924 in FIG. 41). If it is determined that the special effect once ended is to be resumed, the special effect flag 223e is set to ON (see S1908 in FIG. 41), and the special effect is resumed.

  As will be described in detail later, this special effect flag 223e is used to perform display control in the third symbol display device 81, audio output control in the audio output device 226, and lighting on / off control in the lamp display device 227. (See FIGS. 36, 40, and 41).

  The continuity count counter 223f counts the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” during the period from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”. Counter. The continuity count counter 223f is cleared by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). When the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the stop type of the variation effect is “impact of hit”, 1 is added to the continuity count counter 223f (see S1812 in FIG. 40). ). Further, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the jackpot effect ends, the sudden success number counter 223f is cleared (S1914 in FIG. 41). reference). In other words, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” in the period from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot” is counted by the continuity count counter 223f. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the sudden success count counter 223f is cleared. However, it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  This continuity count counter 223f is used to determine the display mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot among the variation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, the continuous continuity counter 223f is used in combination with the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a described above and the effect pattern table 222c described below.

  Here, the effect pattern table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a), 10 (b), and 11. FIG. FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect pattern table 222c used when the special symbol is a big hit, and FIG. 10 (b) shows the contents of the effect pattern table 222c used when the special symbol is lost. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. FIG. 11 is a table showing an example of the contents of “Janken productions A to E”.

  The effect pattern table 222c is a table for determining the display mode of the variable effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and a special symbol jackpot table; Two tables are provided, one for removing special symbols.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, when the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 execute a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot, the game state flag 223 c is set to “special symbol”. If the high probability state A or B ”is indicated, the display mode of the variation effect is determined based on the special pattern jackpot effect pattern table 222c. Further, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates a “special symbol low probability state” and the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h described later exceeds 100, or the special effect flag 223e is turned off. In this case, the display mode of the variation effect is determined based on the special pattern jackpot effect pattern table 222c (see S1808 and S1809 in FIG. 40).

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 execute a fluctuating effect corresponding to a special symbol loss, a continuous notice number counter described later. If the value of 223l is less than 2, the display mode of the variation effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c for removing the special symbol (see S1818 and S1819 in FIG. 40). Note that the effect pattern table 222c is not referred to in the case of executing a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol sudden hit or a special symbol small hit, and the display mode of the variation effect is a specific effect. The corresponding one is determined (see S1816 in FIG. 40).

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the main controller 110 notifies both the special symbol jackpot effect pattern table 222c and the special symbol removal effect pattern table 222c. The display mode of the change effect to be executed is defined in association with the change pattern type to be executed and the value of the above-described sudden success count counter 223f. In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c, the display modes are “no janken effect”, “janken effect A”, “janken effect B”, “ One of “Janken production C” and “Janken production D” is determined. Note that whether or not to execute “Janken production E” is determined based on another condition described later.

  “Janken productions A to E” are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 on the character representing the player (self side) (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) and the opponent's opponent. Characters are displayed, and a game of janken between the characters is started, and finally the conclusion is given. In “Janken productions A to C”, whether the character representing the player (self side) wins or loses the game is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot (15R probable big hit or 15R normal jackpot)”, the character representing the player (your side) wins the janken and the special symbol lottery If the result is “out of special symbol”, “special symbol small hit”, or “special symbol critical hit”, the character representing the player (your side) loses to Janken. On the other hand, “Janken productions D to E” are executed only when the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot”, and the character representing the player (self side) always wins against the opponent character.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in “Janken productions A to E”, after the fluctuation production corresponding to “normal reach (20 seconds)” is executed, it develops into “super reach” or “special reach”. Thereafter, an effect is performed in which the character representing the player (self side) issues a junk. In “Janken Production A”, the character representing the player (your side) gives “Goo”. Similarly, “Janken Production B” gives “Choki”, and “Janken Production C” gives “Par”. put out.

  In “Janken Production D”, “Almighty (Goochoki Par)” is issued. The almighty is a hand that always wins against the opponent's character no matter what hand the opponent's character puts out. In “Janken production E”, the character representing the player (self side) gives “Goo”, while the opponent character gives “Par”. Then, while losing to Janken, after that, while the character representing the player (self side) remains “Goo”, the opponent character is punched and won.

  When “Janken productions A to E” are executed, whether to develop “super reach” or “special reach” is determined according to the variation pattern type notified from main controller 110. Is done. This is common to each janken production A to E. If “super reach (90 seconds)” is notified as the variation pattern type, it will be developed into “super reach” after “normal reach (20 seconds)”. To do. On the other hand, if “special reach (120 seconds)” is notified as the variation pattern type, after “normal reach (20 seconds)”, it develops to “special reach”.

  In “no janken effect”, the above-mentioned “janken effects A to E” are not performed, and normal variation effects (variable display and stop display of the third symbol) are executed. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern type notified from the main controller 110 is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined as “no janken effect”. This is because the variation time is only 20 seconds, so that sufficient production cannot be performed. However, even when the variation pattern type is “normal reach”, a “junken production” with a short production time may be separately provided and executed.

  Here, the description returns to the effect pattern table 222c. As shown in FIG. 10 (a), in the special symbol jackpot effect pattern table 222c, for example, when the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, the sudden success count counter Regardless of the value of 223f, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is defined as “no janken effect”.

  Further, when the variation pattern type is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, if the value of the continuity count counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is displayed. It is defined as “Janken production A”. Thereafter, similarly, when the variation pattern type is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, if the value of the sudden consecutive number counter 223f is 1, display of the variation effect to be executed If the mode is defined as “Janken production B” and the value of the sudden success counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation production to be executed is defined as “Janken production C”, and the value of the continuous success counter 223f is If it is 3, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is defined as “Janken Effect D”.

  In the special pattern jackpot effect pattern table 222c, only three variation pattern types of “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, and “special reach (120 seconds)” are defined. However, other variation pattern types are not defined. This is because, in the case of a special symbol jackpot, any one of “normal reach”, “super reach”, and “special reach” is always selected and notified in the main controller 110. is there. On the other hand, when the special symbol is out of position, in the main controller 110, “short out (5 seconds)”, “long out (11 seconds)”, “normal reach (20 seconds)”, and “super reach (90 seconds)”. ) "Is always selected and notified as the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the effect pattern table 222c for removing special symbols, for example, the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is “short out (5 seconds)” or “long out”. In the case of “(11 seconds)” or “normal reach (20 seconds)”, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is defined as “no janken effect” regardless of the value of the sudden success number counter 223f. Further, even when the variation pattern type is “super reach (90 seconds)”, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is defined as “Janken effect A” regardless of the value of the continuity count counter 223f.

  Here, it returns to description of Fig.9 (a). After the special winning symbol 223g, the special symbol lottery result becomes "special symbol small hit", and then the special symbol lottery result becomes "special symbol 15R probability variable big hit" or "special symbol 15R normal big hit". It is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period until.

  The small after-hit flag 223g is set to OFF by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). Then, when a specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the specific effect ends, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a Is “small hit”, the after small hit flag 223g is set to ON (S1905 in FIG. 41). In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the jackpot effect ends, the after-hit flag 223g is set to OFF (FIG. 41). S1915). This small hitting after flag 223g is used by the small hitting after variation number counter 223h described below to count the number of variation effects executed within a predetermined period.

  The number-of-changes counter 223h after the small hit does not include a case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol small hit”, and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probable big hit of special symbol” or “ It is a counter for counting the number of fluctuating effects (special symbol lottery) executed within a period until it becomes “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”.

  The after-hit variation counter 223h is cleared by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). Then, when a variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the after-hit small hit flag 223g is on, 1 is added to the after-hit variation number counter 223h (see S1815 in FIG. 40). ). In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the jackpot effect ends, the after-hit variation number counter 223h is cleared (FIG. 41). S1914).

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the after-hit variation counter 223h is cleared. However, it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  The small hitting variation count counter 223h is used to determine the display mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol jackpot among the variation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, in a state where the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol”, the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and special effects are being performed. When the flag 223e is on, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined to be “junken effect E” (see S1805 to S1810 in FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, the game state flag 223c indicates the “special symbol low probability state”, the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and the special effect When the middle flag 223e is on, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined as “Janken effect E”. On the other hand, even if the special effect flag 223e is off, the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is 1 to 100 in the state where the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol”. If it is within the range, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed may be determined as “Janken Effect E”.

  Although details will be described later, the after-hit variation number counter 223h is referred to before it is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once completed. More specifically, when it is determined that the special effect being executed is to be ended, and after the special effect is once ended, when the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol detachment is executed, first, the small hit-after change is performed first. The value of the number counter 223h is referred to. Here, if the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, it is determined whether or not the special effect once ended is resumed. If it is out of the range, the special effect is resumed. Whether or not is skipped. Although details will be described later, if the gaming state flag 223c indicates “a high probability state B of a special symbol” even if the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h exceeds 100, It is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once finished.

  The special effect lottery counter 223i is a counter used for determining whether or not the special effect being executed is to be ended or to restart the special effect once ended. The special effect lottery counter 223i is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The special effect lottery counter 223i is updated, for example, by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 149 and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 149).

  In the present embodiment, when the variation effect is executed in a state where the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the variation effect ends. The special effect being executed is controlled to end with a predetermined probability. However, when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the period from when the special effect is controlled to end until the special symbol jackpot, It is controlled so that the special effect once finished is restarted with a predetermined probability.

  The value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is compared with the special effect end determination table 222a described below when determining whether or not to end the special effect being executed, and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is It is determined whether the special effect end determination table 222a is within a predetermined range. If the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is within a predetermined range, the special effect being executed is controlled to end, and otherwise, the special effect is continued.

  Here, the details of the special effect end determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special effect end determination table 222a. The special effect end determination table 222a is a table for determining whether or not to end the special effect when the special effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the special effect end determination table 222a, three random values for determining the end of the special effect are determined, and the range is “0 to 2”. Note that the range of the random number value does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol.

  In this way, the total number of random values that the special effect lottery counter 223i can take is 150 from “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values that determine the end of the special effect is 3, The probability of ending the special effect being executed is “1/50”.

  Here, it returns to description of Fig.9 (a). Further, the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is compared with a special effect resumption determination table 222b described below when determining whether or not to restart the special effect once finished, and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i. Is determined to be within a predetermined range in the special effect resumption determination table 222b. Then, if the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is within a predetermined range, the special effect once ended is controlled to resume, and otherwise, the special effect is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG.12 (b), the detail of the special effect resumption determination table 222b is demonstrated. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special effect resumption determination table 222b. The special effect resumption determination table 222b is a table for determining whether or not to restart the special effect once ended after the special effect is once ended. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the special effect resumption determination table 222b, five random values for determining the resumption of the special effect are defined, and the range is “50 to 54”. Note that the range of the random value does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol.

  In this way, the total number of random values that the special effect lottery counter 223i can take is 150 from “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values that are determined to restart the special effect is 5, The probability that the special effect once finished will be “1/30”.

  Here, it returns to description of Fig.9 (a). The prefetch information storage area 223j stores various information (prediction result of special symbol success / failure prediction result, stop type prediction result, fluctuation pattern type prediction result) notified from the main controller 110 by the above-described prefetch command. It is an area.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223j. The prefetch information storage area 223j has five areas of one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas is provided with at least a special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 and a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2.

  The special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the special symbol and the stop type prediction result, and the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 is a variation pattern. This is an area for storing information indicating the type prediction result. Each area of the prefetch information storage area 223j is initialized in a RAM initial value setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223j is cleared to zero.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110, various information (prediction result of special symbol success / failure prediction result, stop type prediction result, variation pattern type prediction result) from the prefetch command. Is extracted as prefetch information, and the extracted prefetch information is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j.

  When the extracted prefetch information is stored in the reserved area, the area number (first to fourth) of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) is vacant. Data is stored in order from the smallest area. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223j to the execution area. . Specifically, the data stored in the special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 in the holding first area is shifted to the special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 in the execution area. Similarly, the data stored in the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 in the hold first area is shifted to the variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 in the execution area.

  When the data shift to the execution area is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so the data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) Shift processing is performed to fill the reserved area smaller by 1 (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). In this embodiment, in the prefetch information storage area 223j, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) where data is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (the reserved third area to the reserved fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (holding 2nd area-holding | maintenance 4th area) may be shifted to the holding area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Here, it returns to description of Fig.9 (a). The continuous notice lottery counter 223k is a counter used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect, and is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous notice lottery counter 223k is updated by incrementing one by one within a range of 0 to 127, for example, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the prediction result of this prefetching, the jackpot type of the special symbol held, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k, and the like. Then, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is compared with a continuous notice determination table 222d (see FIGS. 13A and 13B) described below, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222d. It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined range. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1715 and S1716 in FIG. 39).

  The continuous notice determination table 222d satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 39)) when a prefetch command is received from the main controller 110. If so, it is a table for setting the “continuous notice determination probability”. Here, the continuous notice determination probability is a probability of determining that the third symbol display device 81 starts the continuous notice effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B, details of the continuous notice determination table 222d will be described. FIGS. 13A and 13B are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222d. As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the continuous notice determination table 222d has two special notice determination tables 222d for special symbol jackpots and a special notice determination table 222d for losing special symbols. Has two tables. The voice lamp control device 113 displays the special symbol when the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15 normal jackpot)”. When the big-hit continuous notice determination table 222d is selected and the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “front / rear out of reach”, the special symbol losing continuous notice determination table 222d is selected. In the present embodiment, the continuous notice determination table 222d is not selected when the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “surprise or small hit”.

  Both the special symbol jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d and the special symbol loss continuous notice determination table 222d are both the special symbol hold ball counter 223b (the number of times of variable display hold) in the sound lamp control device 113. N) stipulates the range of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k that determines the start of the continuous notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “continuous notice determination range”) in association with each of the possible values “1” to “4”. is doing.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the special symbol jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In addition, “0-15” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “2” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice is associated with the value “3” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. “0 to 39” is defined as the determination range, and “0 to 63” is defined as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “4” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Also, the special symbol removal continuous notice determination table 222d defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In association with the value “2” of 223b, “0-9” is defined as the continuous notice determination range, and “0” is set as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “3” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. “25” is specified, and “0 to 39” is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “4” of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 39)). If so, one of the special notice jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d and the special symbol removal consecutive notice determination table 222d is selected as a table for setting the continuous notice determination probability. Then, the continuous notice determination range associated with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b at that time is specified from the selected continuous notice determination table, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k at that time is determined as the continuous notice. When included in the range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  The special symbol jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d and the special symbol loss consecutive notice determination table 222d in the example of FIG. 13 both increase as the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b increases. Although it is stipulated that the continuous notice determination range is wide, if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it will be easier to decide to perform the continuous notice effect, and the probability of continuous notice determination will be higher, so special symbol jackpot Both the continuous notice determination table 222d and the special notice removal notice table 222d for the special symbol both have a continuous notice determination probability as the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold) increases. It means that it is prescribed to be higher. Here, since the continuous notice effect is performed over all the fluctuating effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is determined, the higher the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice determination probability becomes. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous notice effects will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect has been performed as the continuous notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects. A sense of expectation can be given. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it can be suppressed so that the continuous notice effect is not frequently performed. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  When the special symbol jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d in the example of FIG. 13 is compared with the special symbol loss continuous notice determination table 222d, it corresponds to the value of the same special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. The attached continuous notice determination range is defined such that the special symbol jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d is the same or wider than the special symbol removal continuous notice determination table 222d. In other words, when the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect is “special symbol jackpot (15R probable big hit, 15R normal jackpot)”, the continuous notice decision probability is the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect “out of special symbol”. Is set to be equal to or higher than the continuous notice determination probability in the case of “special symbol small hit, special symbol hit probability”. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is highly likely that the gaming state will become a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) after the end of the continuous notice effect. Can be suggested to the player, so that the player can have a high sense of expectation. Also, the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (that is, the result of a lottery performed when winning a ball to the first entrance 64) is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)” Is set to be smaller than the probability of `` Special design off, special design small hit, special design hit probability '', so the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice production is `` Special design off, In the case of “special design small hits, special symbol sudden hits”, while it is possible to suppress frequent continuous notice effects, “special design big hits (15R probability variable big hits, 15R normal big hits)” In this case, it is possible to facilitate the continuous notice effect.

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, not only the case where the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is extracted from the prefetch command received from the main control device 110 is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)”, Even when the prediction result of the stop type is “front / rear out of reach (out)”, permission determination for continuous notice effect is performed. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the stop type is “surprise or small hit”, the permission determination for the continuous notice effect is not performed. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous notice effect even when the prediction result of the stop type is “front / rear out of reach”, etc. Can be performed under various conditions. Therefore, when a continuous notice effect is performed, various expectations can be given to the player. In addition, as a result of the lottery, even if the special symbols are continuously removed, a continuous notice effect is performed, so that the player can have high expectation and the player is bored. Can be prevented.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The continuous notice number counter 223l is a counter that counts the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. The initial value of the continuous notice counter 223l is set to 0, and when the pre-read command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the number of special symbol holding balls at that time The value of the counter 223b is stored (see S1717 in FIG. 39).

  The value of the continuous notice counter 223l is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 and a stop type command corresponding to the variation type command. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. If the extracted stop type is “displacement (completely disengagement, reach out of front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear out)” and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223l is 2 or more, the extracted stop type Instead, the chance is set as the stop type (see S1820 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. The value of the continuous notice counter 223l is decremented by 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation type command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 (see S1826 in FIG. 40).

  When the display stop type command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the stop display of the variation effect is controlled. When the chance type is set as the stop type, for example, on the active line L1 shown in FIG. A symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, the value of the continuous notice counter 223l is the value even if the stop type is “out” (completely out, back-and-forth outreach, reach other than back-and-forth out). If it is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1822 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Even when the variation type command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, if the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 0, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is maintained as 0. (See S1825: No in FIG. 40). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Further, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command and the value of the continuous notice count counter 223l is 1, it is the last variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so that the stop type is The chance type is not set, and the extracted stop type is set as it is as in the case where the value of the continuous notice counter 223l is 0 (see S1817: No in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. However, in this case, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is decremented by 1 (see S1826 in FIG. 40).

  As described above, while the value of the continuous notice counter 223l is 2 or more, the variation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 and the stop type command corresponding to the variation type command are received, and the stop When the stop type is extracted from the type command, if the stop type is “displacement (completely out, reach back and forth out of reach, reach other than back and forth out of reach)”, the chance type is set as the stop type and the set A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect being performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol that becomes a chance is displayed.

  Here, the continuous notice number counter 223l stores the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b at the time when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined. Each time a stop type command corresponding to the variation type command is received, if the value is 1 or more, the value is decreased by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop symbols that become chance chances are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the variable effects held in the main controller 110. That is, stop symbols that become chances are continuously displayed.

  Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chances as the stop pattern of the changing effect most watched during the game. In addition, even if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as a stop symbol, the player has a sense of expectation that a jackpot will be obtained after the end of the continuous notice effect by displaying the chance chance. Can be made.

  Further, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command, the value of the continuous notice counter 223l is referred to in order to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (FIG. 39). S1705). And when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 0 (see S1706 of FIG. 39: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in all the variable effects reserved in the main controller 110. It is determined that a predetermined condition (condition 1 described later) is satisfied, and the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing related to the continuous notice effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, and wins the first entrance 64. Based on the data (each counter C1-C3, CS1 value) acquired according to (start winning prize), the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched, and various information obtained by the prefetching (prediction of the success or failure of the special symbol) As a result, the stop type prediction result and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result) are included in the pre-read command and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the prefetch command, stores them as prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223j, and decides to start the continuous notice effect according to the contents of the prefetch information storage area 223j. to decide. Then, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, the stop type is set for each variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the audio lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  As for the post-notice jackpot flag 223m, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice number counter 223l, so that all the continuous notice effects set for a plurality of variable effects are executed. It is a flag indicating a gaming state after a subsequent variation effect. When the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is ON, the game state after the fluctuating effect after execution of all the continuous notice effects is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) When the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is OFF, the game state after the fluctuating effect after all the continuous notice effects have been executed is “out of special symbol, special symbol It shows that it will be in the state of “small hit or special symbol hit”. The variation effect after execution after all the continuous notices is a change effect performed when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 1.

  The post-notice jackpot flag 223m is used to predict whether the special symbol extracted from the pre-read command when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect based on the pre-read command received from the main control device 110. If the result is “special symbol jackpot”, “ON” is set (see S1719 in FIG. 39), and the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is extracted from the prefetch command is “excluded from special symbol, special symbol jackpot or If it is “A special symbol hit”, “OFF” is set (see S1720 in FIG. 39). The value is held until the next start of the continuous notice effect is determined.

  Further, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is being executed when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the sound lamp controller 113 refers to the post-notice big hit flag 223m (see S1707 in FIG. 39). If the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is on (see S1707: Yes in FIG. 39), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is a “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” status, the execution of the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the continuous notice effect is set. Whether there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) between the last fluctuating effects (holding balls) (that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l) It is determined whether or not the difference is 3 or more), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition (condition 2 described later) is satisfied (see S1709 in FIG. 39).

  On the other hand, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is OFF (see S1707 in FIG. 39: No), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the status is “Special symbol out of place, Special symbol small hit, or Special symbol sudden hit” state, the prediction result of special symbol newly notified by pre-read command is “Special symbol big hit” It is determined whether or not (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) is satisfied, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition (condition 3 to be described later) is satisfied (see S1711 in FIG. 39). .

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 38) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins (starts winning) at the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the timing of the new starting win. Are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. Then, after that, when the data stored in the reserved area is shifted to the execution area in main controller 110, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the shifted data.

  When a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, a special symbol variation display is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 120 seconds) has elapsed, a lottery is performed. A special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is performed, the main control device includes a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern type of the variation effect executed in response to the special symbol lottery and a stop type command indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. 110 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the variation pattern type from the variation pattern command, and when receiving the stop type command, extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command. .

  When the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the variation pattern type and the stop type corresponding to the variation pattern type, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the extracted variation pattern type and stop type in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. . Also, a command is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation display and stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the extracted variation pattern type and stop type. Send. Thereby, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the fluctuation | variation display and stop display of a 3rd symbol are performed synchronizing with the fluctuation | variation display and stop display of the 1st symbol in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37. FIG.

  As described above, the stop types indicating the lottery results of special symbols include “15R probability variation big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “crash hit”, “small hit”, “completely out (out)”, “ Front / rear detachment (disengagement) ”and“ reach other than anteroposterior detachment (detachment) ”are provided. In addition, as a variation pattern type, “special reach (120 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “long out (11 seconds)”, “short out (5 seconds)” Is provided.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “special symbol 15R normal jackpot”, the first symbol display device 37 In addition, a variable display is made on the third symbol display device 81, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation big hit”, “special symbol 15R It is possible to recognize whether it is “normal jackpot”. Further, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the first special gaming state is ended according to the lottery result.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a 15-round jackpot (first special gaming state). In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 displays the display control device so that a display (a jackpot effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Various commands are transmitted to 114. During the first special game state, the main controller 110 performs control so that the “first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” described above is executed.

  The “first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” means that after the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “10 balls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a”. Opening / closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a when the “winning” and “30 seconds from opening” condition is satisfied, and this opening / closing operation is repeated 15 times. That is.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery result is “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol”, when the first special gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to “high probability state A of special symbol”. Here, the sound lamp control device 113 displays a rear image indicating the rear image to be displayed on the display control device 114 so that the “rear image for high probability” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send a change command. Moreover, according to the back image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the lighting and blinking pattern of the illumination parts 29-33 and the sound (music) output from the audio | voice output apparatus 226 (refer FIG. 5) are selected. , Lighting and flashing, and audio output.

  When receiving the back image change command, the display control device 114 extracts the type of the back image from the back image change command. When the display control device 114 extracts the type of the back image, the display control device 114 displays the back image corresponding to the extracted type as the back image of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery result is “15R special jackpot of special symbol”, when the first special gaming state is ended, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal symbol of Transition to "short-time state". Here, the sound lamp control device transmits a back image change command to the display control device 114 so that the “back image for time reduction” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, according to the back image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the lighting and blinking pattern of the illumination parts 29-33 and the sound (music) output from the audio | voice output apparatus 226 (refer FIG. 5) are selected. , Lighting and flashing, and audio output.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery result is “15 R special jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, according to the lottery result of special symbol “ “Back image for high probability” and “Back image for time reduction” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the lottery result of the special symbol by paying attention to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the player can recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol big hit” or “special symbol small hit”, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device In 81, a variable display is made, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. However, among the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol indicating the hit of the special symbol is similar to the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol. Further, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol big hit” or “special symbol small hit”, the third symbol display device 81 displays the same third symbol (that is, reach) The generated “separate special symbol”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small” It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a “win”. The reason why the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be difficult for the player to recognize will be described later.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. In this case, the sound lamp control device 113 displays the display control device so that a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Various commands are transmitted to 114. During the second special game state, the main controller 110 performs control so that the above-described “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” is executed.

  The “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” means that a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “until 0.2 seconds have elapsed”) has elapsed after the specific winning opening 65a is opened. In this case, it is an opening / closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a, and this opening / closing operation is repeated 15 times.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning”, when the second special gaming state is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to “special symbol high probability state B”. Here, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a back image change command to the display control device 114 so that the “back image for special effects” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, according to the back image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the lighting and blinking pattern of the illumination parts 29-33 and the sound (music) output from the audio | voice output apparatus 226 (refer FIG. 5) are selected. , Lighting and flashing, and audio output.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol small hit”, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at the current state even when the second special game state being executed ends. . However, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a rear image change command to the sound lamp display control device 114 so that the “back image for special effects” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, according to the back image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the lighting and blinking pattern of the illumination parts 29-33 and the sound (music) output from the audio | voice output apparatus 226 (refer FIG. 5) are selected. , Lighting and flashing, and audio output.

  Hereinafter, in the state where the “rear image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, lighting and blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33 corresponding to the “rear image for special effect” The voice (music) output of the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) is described as “special effect” being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the special symbol lottery result is “exclusion of special symbol” and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are subjected to variable display and stop display, the third symbol is displayed. The rear image of the display device 81 may be changed.

  Although details will be described later, for example, in a state where the special effect is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “out of the special symbol”, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the variation. When the stop display is made, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to end the special effect being executed. Here, when it is determined that the special effect being executed is to be ended, the sound lamp control device 113 causes the display control device 114 to display the “back image at low probability” on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the rear image change command is transmitted.

  Thereafter, when the special effect being executed is once ended, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “excluded from the special symbol”, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display the variation display and the stop display. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to resume the special effect once finished. Here, if it is determined that the special effect is to be resumed, the audio lamp control device 113 displays the rear surface of the display control device 114 so that the “back image at the time of the special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image change command is transmitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, an example of the flow of the specific effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 and the special effect will be described. Note that, as described above, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small hit”. In addition, in the special effect, there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”, and there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in an advantageous state for the player. This is an effect for notifying the player that there is a game.

  FIG. 14 shows an effect (specific effect) that is executed in the pachinko machine 10 when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a drawing of a special symbol after a specific performance is performed, and the lottery result of the special symbol is “a special symbol 15R probability variation big hit. ”Or“ Special design 15R normal jackpot ”is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of effects executed in the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using this as a trigger. After that, as shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in a variable manner. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol win / win” or “special symbol small hit”, the variable display (variation effect) on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 is performed. When the game is completed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. Then, a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, during the second special game state, the main controller 110 performs control so that the above-described “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” is executed. The “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” means that a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “until 0.2 seconds have elapsed”) has elapsed after the specific winning opening 65a is opened. In this case, it is an opening / closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a, and this opening / closing operation is repeated 15 times.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning”, when the second special gaming state is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to “special symbol high probability state B”. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol small hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change when the second special gaming state ends. In addition, “back image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the special effect is started.

  Here, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn in a state where the special effect is being executed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts. Is done. In the present embodiment, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to a different one during the special effect and other than during the special effect. In addition, during special effects and other than during special effects, the lighting and flashing patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and sound (music) output from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226 (see FIG. 5). Will be changed to another.

  Therefore, the player is paying attention to the back image of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the lighting and blinking patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, and the sound of the audio output device 226, so that the special effect is being performed. Can recognize if it is not inside. However, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit”, regardless of the lottery result, the special effect is similarly executed in the pachinko machine 10. The Therefore, even if the player can recognize whether the special effect is being performed or not during the special effect, whether the special effect has been executed because the lottery result of the special symbol has been “hit the special symbol”, It is not possible to grasp whether the special effect has been executed with the result of the lottery being “special design small hits”.

  As a result, the player determines whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol high probability state B”, or the special symbol lottery result. Becomes a “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed, and it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, the player can recognize the lottery result. Further, the player can grasp the gaming state after the jackpot is ended according to the lottery result. Therefore, even if a special effect is executed and the player is in a state where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol lottery result will be “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “special symbol 15R normal If it is a “hit”, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a case will be described in which a special symbol lottery is performed during a special performance, and the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot). As shown in FIG. 15, during the special performance, when the special symbol lottery result is “15R probability big hit of special symbol” or “15R normal big hit of special symbol”, the first symbol display device 37 or When the variation display (variation effect) on the three-symbol display device 81 is completed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is subsequently shifted to the first special gaming state. Note that the special performance that was being executed ends here. Then, a display (a jackpot effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the first special gaming state is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which a fanfare effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The fanfare effect is an effect for raising the player's expectation by informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while congratulating the jackpot. In addition, the ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the jackpot ends.

  During the jackpot presentation, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lighting and flashing patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, and the sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (FIG. 5) according to each production period. The sound (music) output from (see) is updated to notify that the jackpot is being hit.

  Further, during the first special gaming state (during execution of the jackpot effect), the main controller 110 performs control so that the “first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” described above is executed. The “first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” means that after the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “10 balls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a”. Opening / closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a when the “winning” and “30 seconds from opening” condition is satisfied, and this opening / closing operation is repeated 15 times. That is.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery result is “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol”, when the first special gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to “high probability state A of special symbol”. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is “15R special jackpot of special symbol”, when the first special gaming state is ended, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to “low probability state of special symbol”.

  Here, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Above, description about an example of the flow of the specific effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 and a special effect is complete | finished.

  As described above, this pachinko machine 10 has the same specific effect in the same way regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol hit”. It is configured to be executed. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed in accordance with the specific effect is also configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific performance or the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol winning” or “special symbol small hit” Become.

  Here, the reason why the player is configured to make it difficult to recognize whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit”.

  In conventional pachinko machines, there are only three special symbol lottery results: the above-mentioned “special symbol probable jackpot”, the above “special symbol normal jackpot”, and the above “extra special symbol”. It wasn't. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “a low probability state of a special symbol”, the game is likely to be monotonous.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol probable big hit” or “special symbol normal big hit”. Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “exclusion of special symbol”, the player can easily grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine has not changed. Therefore, if the game state of the pachinko machine is “special symbol low probability state”, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “exclusion of special symbol”, the player can easily continue to have a low probability of winning. Can grasp.

  Also, in the case of a pachinko machine, if the game state of the pachinko machine is “special symbol low probability state” and a special symbol is drawn, for example, with a probability of 1/300, “special symbol jackpot (special symbol probability change). The winning probability is set so as to be “a jackpot, a normal jackpot of a special symbol”. On the other hand, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “high probability state of special symbol”, when a special symbol lottery is made, for example, with a probability of 1/30, “special symbol jackpot (special symbol probable big hit, special symbol The winning probability is set so that “the normal big hit of Therefore, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “low probability state of special symbol”, if a special symbol lottery is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is often “out of special symbol”.

  Therefore, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is “low probability state of special symbol”, even if the special symbol lottery is made, the player will receive a special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot I couldn't have a strong sense of expectation that it would be “a special jackpot for special designs”. Therefore, it was easy for the game to become monotonous.

  Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, “special hits for special symbols” and “small hits for special symbols” are provided as special symbol lottery results. As a result, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “low probability state of special symbol”, even if the special symbol lottery is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as “special symbol jackpot (special symbol probable change). It has become possible to have a strong expectation that it will be a “big hit, a special jackpot for special symbols”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the first symbol display device 37 and the special symbol lottery result 37 regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small hit”. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a similar stop display. Moreover, it is comprised so that the same specific production may be performed similarly. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed in accordance with the specific effect is also configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display, the specific effect, and the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small hit”. It becomes difficult to recognize.

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”, but the special symbol of When the lottery result is “special symbol small hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. In addition, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of the special symbol”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as in the case of the “high probability state A of the special symbol”. , "Normal state short time state" does not become. Therefore, in this state, even if the normal symbol lottery is made and the “normal symbol hit” is made, as in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “the low probability state of the special symbol”, “ Control is performed so that the “second opening / closing operation of the electric accessory” is performed. That is, both when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol”, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance Works similarly.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player can grasp the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit”. Or, when the “special symbol small hit” is reached, the player can play the game of the pachinko machine 10 until the special symbol lottery result becomes “the special symbol 15R probability variable big hit” or “the special symbol 15R normal big hit”. It becomes difficult to grasp whether the state is “high probability state B of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol”.

  As a result, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol”, the player cannot grasp it, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol B”. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the winning probability is high. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the lottery of the special symbol The player can now have a strong expectation that the result will be a special symbol jackpot (special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot, special symbol 15R regular jackpot). Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 can enhance the interest of the game.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined by the player by providing “special symbol hits” and “special symbol small hits” as the special symbol lottery results. As a result, the following problem arises.

  First, the case where it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described more specifically. For example, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “a special symbol hit” Or suppose it is a “special design small hit”.

  As described above, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit”, the first symbol display device 37 is similar regardless of the special symbol lottery result. The first symbol is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the same 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, and also a specific effect is performed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the 1st symbol, the stop display of the 3rd symbol, and the specific effect, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “ It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "small hit".

  Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is once “a special symbol hit” or When “special symbol small hit” is reached, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”. The lottery result is “special symbol small hit”, and the player cannot grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “exclusion of special symbol”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating that the lottery result indicates (out of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (excluding the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, while the jackpot effect, the specific effect, the special effect, or the like is not performed. For this reason, the player can recognize “disappearance of the special symbol” if attention is paid to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, and the presence / absence of the performance. And since the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the player can also grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. However, since the player has not been able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the “exclusion of the special symbol”, the player cannot continue to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol”. Is “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”. In this case, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the similar first symbol regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Moreover, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the stop display of the same 3rd symbol is performed irrespective of the special symbol lottery result, and also the specific effect is similarly performed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the 1st symbol, the stop display of the 3rd symbol, and the specific effect, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “ It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "small hit".

  Therefore, whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol win-win” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol high probability state B”, or the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol small The player cannot grasp whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed. In addition, the player cannot grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 before the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player cannot continue to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, the lottery result of the special symbol in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol” Becomes “15R probability jackpot for special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot for special symbol”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating the lottery result (special symbol jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (special symbol jackpot) is stopped and displayed, and subsequently, the jackpot effect is performed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display car of the 1st symbol and the stop display of the 3rd symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “special symbol” Can be recognized. If attention is paid to the jackpot effect, it can be recognized that the special symbol has been won.

  When the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol”, after the 15th round jackpot (first special gaming state) is finished, the player has the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 “special symbol of It can be understood that the state becomes “high probability state A”. Further, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R normal jackpot”, the player, after the 15th round jackpot (first special gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” Can be understood.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set after the end of the 15 round jackpot (first special gaming state) even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been grasped so far. Therefore, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “a special symbol hit”. Or, even if it becomes “special symbol small hit” and the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol 15R probable big hit” or “special symbol bonus If the “15R normal jackpot” is reached, then the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, even if the player becomes able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 up to this point remains difficult to grasp.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine in which the special symbol lottery result and the “special symbol winning hit” and the “special symbol small hit” are provided, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (first special game) State), and even if a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time, in any circumstances (for example, the game state at the time of the lottery, etc.) The jackpot of the special symbol ends without knowing whether the payout has been made. That is, despite the fact that the player has won the special symbol jackpot, the background to the acquisition remains unclear.

  Therefore, there is a risk that the player may be wondered about the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the lottery result of the special symbol has become a “special jackpot”. If the player is questioned, the player will continue to play the game without the question being resolved, and the player may continue to have discomfort thereafter. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  In particular, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit”. Or, after the player becomes unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the “special design small hit”, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time). If the symbol is a big hit, there is a high risk of discomfort for the player.

  In other words, after the player is unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time), the pachinko machine Including 10 cases where the player can no longer grasp the game state, among the special symbol lottery up to the third (for example, the third) lottery, the result of any special symbol lottery is "special symbol hit" There is a high risk that the player may have doubts that it was.

  In other words, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and the winning probability is high, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 for a few times (for example, When the special symbol lottery is performed for the third time, the player is likely to have doubts that the special symbol lottery result may have been a “special symbol jackpot”.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the game state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any special symbol out of the special symbol lottery up to the third (for example, the third) The player cannot know whether or not has become a “special symbol hit”. For this reason, the player continues the game without the question being resolved, and thereafter, the player is likely to continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  In addition, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 In the special symbol lottery about 100th, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “special symbol low probability state”, and the winning probability (for example, 1/300) is low, but when the special symbol drawing of the 100th time is made, fortunately, the player doubts that the lottery result of the special symbol has become a “special symbol jackpot” There is a risk of holding.

  However, with the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any special symbol out of the special symbol lottery up to about 100th time is “special symbol of The player cannot know whether or not the game has been “hit.” For this reason, the player continues the game without the question being resolved, and thereafter, the player is likely to continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. (90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", one of" Janken effects A to E "is executed in the variable display. And, it is configured to notify the player of how the special symbol of this time is a big hit depending on the type of the executed janken production. Although the reason will be described later, this makes it possible to arouse the player and enhance the fun of the game. When the variation pattern type is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “Janken effects A to E” are not performed, and normal variation display (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) is performed.

  As described above, “Janken productions A to E” are displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 with the character representing the player (self side) (the boy with a bee in this embodiment) and the opponent. The other party's character is displayed, and the junken game between each character is started, and finally the conclusion is given.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, if the “Janken production” is executed, the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken (or Finally, if you win the opponent ’s character), and the special symbol lottery result is “Excluded from Special Symbol”, if “Janken Production” is executed, the character representing the player (your side) will be lose. “Janken production A” is executed both when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” and when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”. However, “Janken effects B to E” are executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. Therefore, the player can recognize that the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot” when “Janken effects B to E” are executed.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol jackpot effect Depending on the pattern table 222c and the value of the continuity probability counter 223f, any one of “no janken effect, janken effects AD” is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1808 in FIG. 40).

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot” and variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern type of the variable display is “super reach (90 Second) ”or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, and if the value of the continuity count counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variable display is determined as“ Janken effect A ”, and the player ( The display mode is determined so that the character representing the player's side wins the janken. Similarly, if the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined as “Janken effect B”, and if the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variable effect is changed. If “Janken production C” is determined and the value of the counter value of continuous continuation counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the variation production is decided to be “Janken production D”, and the characters representing the respective players (self side) are The display mode is determined so as to win.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach” is performed. (120 seconds) ”and if all of the following three conditions are satisfied,“ Janken production E ”is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation production (see S1805 to S1807 in FIG. 40).

  The first condition is that the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol”, and the second condition is that the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is 100 or less. It is. The third condition is that the special effect flag 223e is on. Here, when all three conditions are satisfied, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of “low probability state of special symbol”, and once the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol small hit”, After that, until the variable display is executed 100 times, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become “surprise” and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot”.

  As described above, in the period from the last “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode of the variation effect (the type of the janken effect) is determined by the value of the sudden success number counter 223f.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the player pays attention to the type of “janken effect” executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol hit” from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”. Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot” after that, the player displays the variation effect. It can be understood in what gaming state the special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made according to the mode (that is, the type of janken production).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)”. If there is, “Janken effect A” is executed in the variation display. That is, when the special symbol lottery result is “excluded from special symbol” and the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the “junken effect A” is performed regardless of the value of the counterfeit consecutive number counter 223f. Is determined as the display mode of the fluctuating effect.

  Therefore, the player cannot recognize the number of times that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol win” from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player cannot grasp the gaming state in which the special symbol lottery (disconnection of the special symbol) was made this time. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the special The player can have a strong sense of expectation that the symbol lottery result will be a “special symbol jackpot”.

  Next, by executing “Janken production” on the third symbol display device 81, examples of contents that can be grasped by the player, and reasons why the player can be delighted and can enhance the fun of the game. An example will be specifically described.

  In the case where the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production A”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Janken, This means that the lottery result of the special symbol has never been “special hit of special symbol” between this time and the “special symbol jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results between the previous “Special design jackpot” and the current “Special symbol jackpot” are either “Special design miss” or “Special design jackpot”. In any case, this means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult for the player to grasp, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs variable display, the display mode is “Janken effect A”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the most recent gaming state in which it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player understands that each specific performance performed during the difficult period including the case where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is due to “special design small hits”. it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for about the 100th time. Then, although the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains “the low probability state of the special symbol”, and the winning probability is low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when the special symbol lottery is made for the 100th time, fortunately, there is a possibility that the lottery result of this special symbol may have become a “special symbol jackpot”. is there.

  In addition, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30). ) However, if it is not easy to win and this special symbol drawing is done, there may be a doubt that the special symbol lottery result will be a “special symbol jackpot” .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production A”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, Fortunately, although the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lottery result of this special symbol is “special symbol jackpot” Can be understood. Thus, if the predictions are correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her thoughts were correct. Further, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has been lucky in the situation where the winning probability is low.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode is “Janken production B” and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol winning” once during the period from the “big bonus” to the “special symbol jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, a variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken effect B”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol sudden hit” once between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, including the case where the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of any special symbol among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third) is “special symbol” There is a high risk of doubting that it may have been a “good hit”. That is, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30). Therefore, there is a high risk of doubt that the result of this special symbol lottery may have been a “special jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production B”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the janken, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that a “special symbol jackpot” has been made immediately after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol big hit” twice from the “big jackpot” to the “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs variable display, and the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol hit” twice between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special jackpot”. . In addition, the player is responsible for “special symbol hits” twice in each of the specific effects performed within the difficult period of time, including when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult to grasp. It can be grasped that the others were due to "special bonuses".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol may have become “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that a “special symbol jackpot” has been made immediately after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  In addition, the player may receive a special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special hit of special symbol” twice.

  As described above, “special symbol wins” is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but if it is determined to be “special jackpot”, the probability of “special symbol hits” is , “1/6”. On the other hand, the probability of “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” is “1/3”, and the probability of “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” is “1/2”. Thus, when the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, it is determined that the “special symbol 15R probability jackpot” or “the special symbol 15R normal jackpot” is determined rather than the “special symbol jackpot”. Is more likely to be determined.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become a “special symbol jackpot”, including a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can no longer be grasped, It is a little disappointing that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special hit of the special symbol” twice. As described above, by executing the “junken effect” in the third symbol display device 81, the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, This means that the lottery result of the special symbol has reached the “special symbol big hit” three times or more from the “big jackpot” to the current “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult for the player to grasp, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display, and the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player understands that the lottery result of the special symbol has been more than three times in the “special symbol big hit” between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. it can. Also, at least three times of the specific effects executed within the difficult period of time, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player is based on “a special symbol hit” It can be understood that the others were due to "small bonuses for special symbols".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for several times (for example, the fourth).

  Then, as described above, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the fourth), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have the satisfaction that the game game has become a “special jackpot” as soon as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  In addition, the player may receive a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth), including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special symbol hit” at least three times.

  As described above, “special symbol wins” is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but if it is determined to be “special jackpot”, the probability of “special symbol hits” is , “1/6”. That is, there is a higher probability of being determined as “a special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “a special symbol 15R normal jackpot” than being determined as “special symbol jackpot”.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become a “special symbol jackpot”, including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can no longer be grasped, among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the fourth), I am very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol has been "special hits" more than once. As described above, by executing the “junken effect” in the third symbol display device 81, the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (your side) wins the opponent's character, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become the “special hit of the special symbol” between the special symbol jackpot and the current “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results between the previous “Special design jackpot” and the current “Special symbol jackpot” are either “Special design miss” or “Special design jackpot”. In any case, this means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. Further, it means that the lottery of special symbols has not exceeded 100 times since the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, a variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins over the opponent's character, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in a “special symbol low probability state”. In addition, the player, once the special symbol lottery result is "special symbol small hit", and then the special symbol lottery result does not become "surprise hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. In addition, the player understands that each specific performance performed during the difficult period including the case where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is due to “special design small hits”. it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for about the 100th time.

  Then, as described above, although the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the winning probability is not changed. If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then the special symbol lottery is made about the 100th time, fortunately, the special symbol lottery result may have become a “special symbol jackpot”. There is a risk of doubt.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “special symbol high probability state B”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, it was 1/30), but it was hard to win, and when the special symbol drawing was made this time, I was wondering if the special symbol lottery finally became a “special symbol jackpot” There is a risk of holding.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the opponent character. The player is lucky, although the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol of You can see that it was a big hit. Thus, if the predictions are correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her thoughts were correct.

  Also, the player can grasp that the special symbol jackpot has been reached by the time the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he has won in a situation where the winning probability is low and a satisfaction that he has been lucky.

  Further, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Then, in the special symbol lottery for the third time (for example, the third time), it is assumed that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”.

  Then, as described above, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, The player is greatly different from the expectation, and although the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), fortunately the lottery result of the special symbol is “ You can see that it was a special symbol jackpot.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. Under circumstances, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very fortunate to be elected in a very rare situation, and very fortunate, although his thoughts were greatly different.

  Note that in the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation described above occurs, the player cannot grasp the situation. Therefore, for example, since the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), the player has a lottery result of the special symbol “ I thought it would have been a “special design jackpot” and sometimes it ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “ If it is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, any one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variable display. And it is comprised so that it may alert | report to a player how the big symbol of this special symbol was made | formed according to the kind of the executed janken production.

  Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol smash hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol If the lottery result is a special symbol jackpot, the player can determine what game state this special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made according to the type of “Janken production”. I can grasp. Therefore, even if the player has a question about what circumstances (for example, the gaming status at the time of the lottery, etc.), the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot” The question can be solved. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player continues discomfort, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. As a result, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is temporarily set. Becomes “a special symbol hit” or “a special symbol small hit”, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once becomes “ ”Or“ special symbol small hit ”, it is not difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “successful hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high of special symbol” From “probability state A” to “high probability state B of special symbol”. On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “small hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in the “high probability state A of special symbol”.

  Therefore, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, once the lottery result of the special symbol “successful hit of special symbol” ”Or“ special symbol small hit ”, and even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player is able to change the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to the“ high probability state A or B ”. Therefore, in this case, the player is less likely to be questioned as to what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured as follows. And, according to the type of janken production that has been executed, the player is informed of how the special symbol of this time was a big hit, but during the jackpot production, "Janken production AE" is executed May be. Further, the effect to be executed may not be “Janken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of “Janken effects A to E” is associated with the value of the continuity counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect), a rear image displayed in the main display area Dm, and a continuous notice effect. As described above, in this embodiment, as the types of the back image, “back image for high probability”, “back image for time reduction”, “back image for special effect”, and “low probability” Four types of “back-side image for time” are provided, and any one type of back-side image is set as the back-side image of the third symbol display device 81. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 30).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ("back image for high probability", "back image for time reduction", "during special effects"). ”And“ back image for low probability ”, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 42) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not used, The image data stored in the RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source last address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 42).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 17 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the symbol “◯” at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG.18 and FIG.19, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. 18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 18B shows the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 19 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 19A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 19C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 19A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 19A to 19C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 19A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 19A and 19B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 19A to 19B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be obtained when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 19 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  Note that on the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a fanfare data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to special effects, fanfare effects, round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a fluctuating effect is started, the stop type of the fluctuating effect is any one of “displacement (complete disengagement, front / rear disengagement reach, reach other than disengagement before / after disengagement)”, “probable hit”, and “small hit” If there is, a stop symbol indicating “out of special symbol” is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is either “15R probability variation big hit” or “15R normal big hit”, The stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  As described above, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small hit”. In this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special hit of special symbol” or “small hit of special symbol”, the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. When the (variable effect) ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continues to the second special gaming state that is different from the first special gaming state. Then, a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, during the second special game state, the main controller 110 performs control so that the above-described “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” is executed. The “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” means that a predetermined opening period (in this embodiment, “until 0.2 seconds have elapsed”) has elapsed after the specific winning opening 65a is opened. In this case, it is an opening / closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a, and this opening / closing operation is repeated 15 times. Then, when the second special gaming state is finished, the “back image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the special effect is started.

  As described above, in the special performance, there is a possibility that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “high probability state B of the special symbol”, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes an advantageous state for the player. It is an effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility of being. In the present embodiment, during the period during which the special effect is continued (during the special effect), the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set to the “back image for the special effect”. On the other hand, during a period other than during special effects, a different back image (a back image for a high probability, a back image for a short time, a back image for a low probability) is set. Furthermore, the lighting and flashing patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the sound (music) output from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 5) are different during special effects and during special effects. Changed to Thereafter, when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is further executed in a state where the special effect is being executed.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special symbol jackpot and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. It is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while congratulating the special symbol jackpot. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the special symbol jackpot is over.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to a specific effect, a special effect, a fanfare effect, a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, is prepared with 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 20). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as with the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 42). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 53B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 44B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 44 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 45 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 53A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the contents of image drawing instructions for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 44 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S3205 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 22), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 22, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 44B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3207 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3717 in FIG. 54). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3718 in FIG. 54). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 55).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 44B) is executed (see S3802 in FIG. 55).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, reading processes of various winning switches are executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are When reaching the maximum value (in this embodiment, 899, 119, 99, 198, 239, respectively), it is cleared to 0. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one turn), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one turn), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a display pattern on the first symbol display device 37 and a variation pattern type of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning a prize at the entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and if there is a start winning, the amount of the winning is excluded. If the number of reserved balls is less than the maximum value (4 balls), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired at the timing of starting winning and stored in the reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  When the start winning process is finished, next, a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and a normal symbol changing process for setting the opening time and the number of times of the electric accessory are executed (S106). Then, through-gate passage processing accompanying passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of a main process described later is executed, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control apparatus 112 via the payout control apparatus 111.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a start (start winning) at the first entrance 64. If there is a start winning, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is stored in a special symbol reserved ball storage area. In order to prefetch the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for the suspended data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1), the prefetching process described later ( S207) is executed.

  In this start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball counter 203c (variation effect held in the main controller 110) (S202), it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning at the first winning slot 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning at the first winning slot 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reservation pitch counter 203c is 4. If it is above (S203: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value of the counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) is incremented by 1 (S204), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (the number of held balls N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In order to do this, the reserved ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of a main process, which will be described later, is executed, a reserved ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  Next, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer and provided in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 and the first per-type counter storage area 203b2 corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. Then, the data is suspended (stored) in the stop pattern selection counter 203b3 and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is “1”, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are respectively stored in the storage areas 203b1 to 203b4 of the reserved first area. Hold the value. Further, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is “2”, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition is “3” in each of the storage areas 203b1 to 203b4 of the reserved second area. If the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c after the addition is “4”, each storage area 203b1 to 203b4 of the reserved third area is stored in each storage area 203b1 to 203b4 of the reserved third area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held.

  Although details will be described later, when the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value is shifted to the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol lottery, determination of the variation pattern type, and the like are executed. Thus, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is a special symbol lottery performed at the start timing of the variation effect, determination of the variation pattern type, and the like. Used in

  Next, a pre-reading process is executed (S207), and the data (each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1) newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a by the start winning process described above is stored in the special symbol. Prefetch the lottery results. That is, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are also used for prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Details of the prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the prefetch process (S207) is completed, the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the prefetching process (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a prefetch process (S207) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 24). This pre-reading process is a process executed when data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) associated with the detection of the starting prize is newly acquired in the above-described starting prize process (see FIG. 24). The special symbol lottery result is prefetched using the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is firstly stored. Read (S301). The data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a at the end is specified based on the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the reserved first area is specified as the data stored last in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the reserved second area is stored in the reserved third area when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a is 3. When the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 4, the data stored in the reserved fourth area is identified as the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 203e indicates “high probability state A of special symbol” or “high probability state B of special symbol” (S302). In the processing of S302, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates “special symbol high probability state A or B” (S302: Yes), the high probability of the two types of special symbol jackpot random number table 202a prepared The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for time is acquired (S303), and the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the game state flag 203e indicates "low probability state of special symbol" (S302: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability is acquired (S304). , The process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a acquired in the process of S303 or S304 and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 are compared to predict the success / failure (S305). As described above, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored as random number values (hit values) that become special symbol jackpots at low probability. ing. Also, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, 30 random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, as random numbers (winning values) that become jackpots at high probability are stored. 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. Yes. In the process of S305, the random number value (win value) stored in the acquired special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is compared with the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, and they match. In addition, it is predicted that it will be a big hit with a special symbol.

  Next, as a result of the comparison in S305, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is predicted (S306). : Yes), the jackpot type and the variation pattern type at the time of the jackpot are predicted (S307). In the process of S307, first, the special symbol jackpot type table 202b is compared with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the jackpot type. Next, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table 202d for jackpot is compared with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the fluctuation pattern type. Then, when the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to S313.

  On the other hand, when it is predicted in the process of S306 that the special symbol is not a big hit (S306: No), the special symbol small hit random number table 202c is acquired (S308). Then, the acquired special symbol small hit random number table 202c is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 to predict a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is small hit (S309). .

  Next, as a result of performing the process of S309, it is determined whether or not it is predicted that the special symbol is a small hit (S310). In the process of S310, when it is predicted that the special symbol is a small hit (S310: Yes), the stop type at the special symbol small hit and the variation pattern type at the special symbol small hit are set. Prediction is performed (S311).

  In the process of S311, first, the stop type at the time of small hitting is predicted as “small hitting”. Next, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for detaching the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the process of S301, and the variation pattern type at the time of small hit of the special symbol is predicted. It should be noted that when the gaming state flag 203e indicates "high probability state A or B of special symbol" and when the normal symbol is in the short-time state (normal symbol time-short), the special symbol is off (probable change). A special symbol variation pattern table 202d is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal state of normal symbol”, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) is compared. Used for. Then, when the process of S311 is completed, the process proceeds to S313.

  On the other hand, when it is predicted that the special symbol is not a small hit in the process of S310 (S310: No), the stop type when the special symbol is lost and the variation pattern type when the special symbol is lost are predicted. (S312). In the process of S312, first, the stop type at the time of detachment of the special symbol is predicted by comparing the stop type selection table (not shown) with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. .

  Next, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for detaching the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained in the process of S301, and the variation pattern type at the time of small hit of the special symbol is predicted. It should be noted that when the gaming state flag 203e indicates "high probability state A or B of special symbol" and when the normal symbol is in the short-time state (normal symbol time-short), the special symbol is off (probable change). A special symbol variation pattern table 202d is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal state of normal symbol”, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) is compared. Used for. Then, when the process of S312 ends, the process proceeds to S313.

  In the process of S313, a command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203 includes a prefetch command indicating whether the predicted special symbol is appropriate, a predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a special symbol), and a predicted variation pattern type. The buffer is set (S313). Thereby, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of a main process described later is executed, a prefetch command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, when the process of S313 is completed, the prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The special symbol variation process (S104) controls variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S401). During the jackpot, during the first special gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during the predetermined time after the end of the first special gaming state And are included.

  As a result of the determination in S401, if it is a big hit now (S401: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit now (S401: No), it is determined whether or not a specific performance is currently being performed (S419). During the specific effect, during the second special game state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 during the specific effect and a predetermined time after the end of the second special game state. In the middle.

  As a result of the determination in S419, if the specific effect is currently being performed (S419: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the specific effect is not currently being performed (S419: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S402), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Is not changing (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after stopping the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S403: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S403, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of the fluctuation (S403: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number of the change display hold balls held in the main controller 110) N) is acquired (S404), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the acquired special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S405). As a result, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) exceeds 0 (S405: Yes), it is determined that the execution timing of the variation effect is started. The value of the counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) is decremented by 1 (S406). This is because the execution of one pending variation effect is started by the special symbol variation start process (S408), which will be described later, and as a result, the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S407). The data shift process performed in the process of S407 is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a toward an area having a smaller area number. is there. Specifically, the first area for holding → the execution area, the second area for holding → the first area for holding, the third area for holding → the second area for holding, the fourth area for holding → the third area for holding, etc. Shift data.

  When the processing of S407 is completed, next, special symbol variation start processing for starting variation display is executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S405, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S405: No), a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 Is determined, that is, whether or not a demonstration is in progress (S409). In the process of S409, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved balls N) is greater than zero. The period up to is determined as being demo.

  If the demonstration is not in progress (S409: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S410), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, when the demonstration is in progress (S409: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S410 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of a main process to be described later is executed, an audio lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S402, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S411). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern type selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed. If not (S411: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S411: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S412). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S408) described later with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the special symbol variation start process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the case of a special symbol jackpot, a stop symbol (special symbol jackpot type) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, after the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or the special symbol 15R normal A stop symbol (big hit type) that is a big hit (a big hit whose maximum number of rounds is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state after a big hit of 15 rounds) is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the special symbol hits the 15R probability variation jackpot after the special symbol jackpot, the blue LED is turned on. When the special symbol jackpot hits the special symbol 15R normal jackpot, the red LED is turned on. Light up. Further, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on in the case of a special symbol hit and the special symbol small hit. Further, when the special symbol is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the fluctuation in the case of a special symbol hit and the case of a special symbol small hit. On the other hand, in other cases, after each LED is lit, the lighting is released when the next variable display is started. In addition, what is necessary is just to decide arbitrarily whether each LED is lighted only for several seconds after a fluctuation | variation stops, or when it light-releases when the next fluctuation display is started after lighting each LED.

  When the processing of S412 is completed, the lottery result corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R It is determined whether it is a normal jackpot or a special symbol hit (S413). In the process of S413, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a special symbol jackpot or a special symbol hit (S413: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e is “low probability state of special symbol”. As shown, the game state flag 203e is set (S414), and the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, the special symbol lottery is not performed, but the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “special symbol low probability state”. In other words, during a period when the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit with a special symbol, the gaming state flag 203e is set to indicate “low probability state of special symbol”. On the other hand, in the process of S413, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is out of the special symbol or the special symbol is a small hit (S413: No), the process of S414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S415. Transition.

In the process of S415, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415).
In the process of S415, when the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415: Yes), the start of jackpot is set ( S416), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. Here, when the jackpot start is set, if a jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) of a main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S415, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is not a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415: No), it corresponds to the current variation display. It is determined whether the lottery result is a special symbol hit or a special symbol hit (S417). In the process of S417, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is a special symbol hit or a special symbol small hit (S417: Yes), the start of a specific effect is set (S418). ), Return to timer interrupt processing. Here, when the start of the specific effect is set, the process branches to S1201: Yes when the specific effect control process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. As a result, the specific effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S417, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is not a special symbol hit or special symbol small hit (S417: No), the lottery result corresponding to the current variation display is This is the case when the special symbol is off. In this case, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S408) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). In the special symbol variation start process (S408), a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Further, the effect pattern (variation pattern type) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each value is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 203e indicates “a special symbol high probability state A or B” (S502), and the gaming state flag 203e indicates “a special symbol high probability state A or B”. (S502: Yes), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability is acquired from the two types of special symbol jackpot random number tables 202a prepared (S503). On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 203e indicates “low probability state of special symbol” (S502: No), the special symbol jackpot random number for low probability among the two types of special symbol jackpot random number tables 202a prepared. The table 202a is acquired (S504).

  Then, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a acquired in the process of S503 or S504 is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 (S505). As described above, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability, three random number values “7, 307, 582” are stored as random number values (hit values) that become special symbol jackpots at low probability. ing. Further, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, 30 random numbers “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178” are used as random number values (hit values) that are jackpots for the special symbol at high probability. , 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 " Stored. In the process of S505, the random number value (win value) stored in the acquired special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is compared with the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501, and they match. In addition, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the comparison in S505 is a special symbol jackpot (S506), and if it is a special symbol jackpot (S506: Yes), the display mode at the time of jackpot is determined (S507). . In the process of S507, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 is compared with the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, and the jackpot type associated with the first hit type counter C2, that is, It is determined whether the special symbol is a 15R probability variation jackpot, the special symbol is a 15R normal jackpot, or the special symbol is a jackpot. Then, based on the determined jackpot type of the special symbol, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the special symbol jackpot type, the special symbol jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, sudden hit) is determined as the stop type as it is. By doing so, the display mode at the time of big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is set. That is, if the jackpot type is “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot”, the stop type is determined as “15R probability variation jackpot”. If the jackpot type is “15R normal jackpot with special symbol”, the stop type is set to “15R normal jackpot”, and if the jackpot type is “special symbol jackpot”, the stop type is “shock hit”. Is determined.

  Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501 and the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol jackpot, the variation pattern type at the time of special symbol jackpot is determined (S508). In the process of S508, the special hit type determined in the process of S507 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501 are selected from the normal reach, the super reach, and the special reach. The variation pattern type at the time of the jackpot of the symbol is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S508, the variation time in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. When the process of S508 is completed, the process proceeds to S516.

  In the process of S506, when the special symbol is not big hit (S506: No), the special symbol small hit random number table 202c is acquired (S509). Then, the acquired special symbol small random number table 202c is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S501 (S510). Then, it is determined whether the comparison result of the processing of S510 is a special symbol small hit (S511). Is determined (S512). In the process of S512, the stop type at the time of the special symbol small hit is determined as “small hit”.

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of small hitting of the special symbol is determined (S513). In the process of S513, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for detaching the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501, and the variation pattern type at the time of the special symbol small hit is determined. . In addition, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates “high probability state A or B of special symbol” and when the normal symbol is in the short-time state (normal symbol time-short), the special symbol is out of place (probability change). A special symbol variation pattern table 202d is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the game state flag 203e is “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal state of normal symbol”, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) is compared. Used for. Note that, by determining the variation pattern type, the variation time in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Then, when the process of S513 is completed, the process proceeds to S516.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when the special symbol is not a small hit (S511: No), the stop type when the special symbol is lost is determined (S514). In the process of S514, a stop type selection table (not shown) and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501 are compared to determine the stop type when the special symbol is off. Here, the stop type is determined as one of “completely disengaged”, “rearward / rearward reach”, and “reach other than frontward / rearward”. Then, when the processing of S514 is completed, next, the variation pattern type when the special symbol is removed is determined (S515). Note that the processing in S515 is the same as the processing in S513, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Then, when the process of S515 is completed, the process proceeds to S516.

  In the process of S516, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type determined by the process of S508, S513, or S515 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S516). Next, a stop type command indicating the stop type determined in S507, S512, or S514 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S517). Then, when the process of S517 is completed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26).

  Note that each command set in the processing of S516 and S517 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 when an external output processing (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main processing described later is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the variation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command or a display stop type command based on the command, and sends it to the display control device 114. Send. As a result, the variation display of the 3rd symbol and the stop display of the 3rd symbol are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). In this through gate passing process (S107), it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area. This is a process for storing (holding) in 203b.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Then, in the process of S601, the sphere has not passed through the second entrance slot 67 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, even if the sphere has passed through the second entrance slot 67, it is a normal symbol. If the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 in the process of S603 ( S603: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S604).

  Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Then, when the process of S605 ends, this process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. In the processing of S701, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit in the processing of S701 (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702). If the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether the current symbol is in the normal symbol time-short state (normal symbol time-short) (S708). If the current symbol is in the normal symbol time-short state (S708: Yes), S710 is performed. Move on to processing. On the other hand, if the current state is not the normal symbol time-short state (S708: No), it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 203e indicates the “special symbol high probability state A” (S709). In the process of S709, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates “high probability state A of special symbol” (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e does not indicate “special symbol high probability state A” (S709: No), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S710, the random number table 202e per normal symbol for high probability is compared with the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 to determine the lottery result of the normal symbol (S710), The process proceeds to S712. As described above, when the comparison is performed using the random number table 202e per ordinary symbol for high probability, if the value of the second per category counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, the normal symbol If it is determined to be a win and is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 7C).

  In the process of S711, the random number table 202e for the normal symbol for low probability is compared with the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined (S711). ), The process proceeds to S712. As described above, when the comparison is performed using the normal probability random number table 202e for low probability, if the value of the second per type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, the normal symbol If it is determined to be a win and is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbols (see FIG. 7C).

  In the process of S712, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol determined in the process of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol (second symbol) (S712). : No), the display mode when the normal symbol is off is set (S721). In the process of S721, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment of the normal symbol is completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, in the process of S712, when the normal symbol is hit (S712: Yes), the display mode when the normal symbol is hit is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S714). In the process of S714, if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S714: Yes), the process proceeds to S719. In the present embodiment, when a special symbol is hit during a special symbol jackpot, the process proceeds to S719, and in the same manner as when the normal symbol is lost, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set. Is done. Thereby, the ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) rather than the first winning hole 64 so that the electric accessory does not obstruct the ball toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. In addition, the number of times of opening the electric accessory and the opening time are set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S714, if the present is not the big hit of the special symbol (S714: No), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is the normal symbol time-short state (ordinary symbol time-short) (S715). When the current time is the short time state of the normal symbol (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. On the other hand, if the current time is not the short time state of the normal symbol (S715: No), it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 203e indicates the “high probability state A of special symbol” (S716). In the process of S716, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates “high probability state A of special symbol” (S716: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e does not indicate “special symbol high probability state A” (S716: No), the process proceeds to S719.

  In the processing of S717, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening is set to 2 (S717). Then, the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S718), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Further, in the process of S719, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening is set to 1 (S719). Then, the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S720), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, except for the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very much as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol. Further, since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it is easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. It becomes a state.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S718 or the processing of S720 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out of the normal symbol and the display mode is set by the processing of S721, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is stopped and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S721.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the normal symbol lottery result this time is a win (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), this process is terminated, and the timer interruption Return to the process (see FIG. 23). When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S717 or the process of S719 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of the current normal symbol is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped, this process is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Return to).

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (sub control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (sub-control device) to the gaming state when the drive power is shut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process of the main control device 110 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (sub External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the pre-read command set in the pre-read process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the previous 4 msec cycle, the fanfare command, the round number command, and the ending command set by the jackpot control process described later are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1002), and then the jackpot control process is executed (S1003). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. In the jackpot control process, the execution time of the jackpot effect and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the jackpot are determined. This is a process for setting. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  Then, when the jackpot control process (S1003) is completed, a specific effect control process is executed (S1004). The details of the specific effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. However, the specific effect control process performs the specific effect and opens a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the specific effect. This is a process for setting the number of releases. In the present embodiment, the specific effect control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  When the specific effect control process (S1004) ends, next, a large opening opening / closing process is executed (S1005). In the large opening opening and closing processing, it becomes "special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)", "special symbol hit bonus", "special symbol jackpot", etc. Mouth) When the opening time and the number of times of opening of 65a are set, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed according to the set opening time and number of times of opening.

  When the large opening opening / closing process (S1005) is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is then executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are set in the normal symbol (second symbol), the set The electric accessory is opened and closed according to the opening time and the number of opening times.

  When the large opening opening / closing process (S1006) ends, next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern type is set by the processing of S508, the processing of S513, or the processing of S515 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27), the variation according to the variation pattern type is set. The variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern type set by the process of S508, the process of S513, or the process of S515 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends. As a result, when the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the processing of S412 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process of S507, the process of S512, or the process of S514 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ( (Lights up).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the second symbol lottery is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. Stop display (lighting display) on the device 83.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010: No), within the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1012). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 30 has been executed, the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the present embodiment, in the main process, a winning ball counting signal, a payout abnormality signal reading process (S1002), a jackpot control process (S1003), a specific effect control process (S1004), a large opening opening / closing process (S1005), and an electric accessory. The opening / closing process (S1006), the first symbol control process (S1007), and the second symbol control process (S1008) are executed, but some or all of these processes are not the main process but the timer interrupt process. You may comprise so that it may execute in.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1003) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) of the main controller 110. The jackpot control process (S1003) is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot, executing various effects according to the jackpot type (special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot, special symbol 15R normal jackpot), This is a process for setting the opening time and the number of times of opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the big hit.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) S416 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. When the special symbol jackpot is started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are set (S1102).

  In the processing of S1102, as the opening time of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a around one round, “10 balls are awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a” and “30 seconds have passed since opening”. Set until one of the conditions is satisfied. Furthermore, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to be opened 15 rounds (15 times).

  Next, the start of opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S1103). Here, when the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set, the large opening opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above is executed. The specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed under the conditions set in.

  Next, a fanfare command is set (S1104), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above, it is sent to the audio lamp controller 113. Sent to. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When a display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, a fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (S1105). During the jackpot of the special symbol, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol, and during the predetermined time after the jackpot game ends And are included.

  In the process of S1105, when the special symbol is not big hit (S1105: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1106). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1106: Yes), a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1107). After the round number command is set, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above, the sound lamp control device 113. Sent to.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1106 (S1106: No), it is determined whether the opening / closing of 15 times of the special winning opening (large opening) 65a has been completed (S1108). In the process of S1108, if the opening / closing of the 15 specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is completed (S1108: Yes), it is the ending effect start timing, so an ending command is set (S1109). The process ends, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above. Sent to.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1108, if the opening / closing of the 15 times the special winning opening (large opening) 65a has not ended (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot of the special symbol being executed. Determination is made (S1110). In the process of S1110, when it is time to end the jackpot of the special symbol being executed (S1110: Yes), the special symbol jackpot end is set (S1111), and the lottery result of this special symbol is “ It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot (S1112).

  In the process of S1112, if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is “special symbol 15R probability variation big hit” (S1112: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e indicates “special symbol high probability state A” Then, the game state flag 203e is set (S1113), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate “special symbol high probability state A”, when the lottery result of this special symbol is “15R probability variation big hit of special symbol”, special When the symbol jackpot ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state A of special symbol”.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is not “special symbol 15R probable big hit” (S1112: No), the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol 15R normal jackpot”, so the game state flag The gaming state flag 203e is set so that 203e indicates "low probability state of special symbol" (S1114). Then, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate “special symbol low probability state”, when the lottery result of this special symbol is “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, the special symbol At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “special symbol low probability state”.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, the gaming state flag 203e indicates that the gaming state flag 203e indicates “low probability state of special symbol”. However, the game state flag 203e is set to “low probability state of special symbol” during the big hit of the special symbol, so that the game state flag 203e is not set (does nothing). May be.

  When the special symbol jackpot is started by the jackpot control process shown in FIG. 33, the opening / closing conditions of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a around one round can be set, and the specific winning opening (large opening) is set. The opening / closing of 65a can be set to be performed 15 rounds (15 times).

  Next, the specific effect control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the specific effect control process (S1004) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) of the main controller 110. The specific effect control process (S1004) is performed when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”, and the specific prize is opened or closed during the specific effect. This is a process for setting the opening time and the number of times of opening the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the specific control process, first, it is determined whether a specific effect is started (S1201). Specifically, if the process of S418 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed and the start of the specific effect is set, it is determined that the specific effect is started. In the process of S1201, when the specific effect is started (S1201: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are set (S1202).

  In the process of S1202, “until 0.2 seconds elapses from the opening” is set as the opening time of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a around one round (around one time). Furthermore, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to be opened 15 rounds (15 times). Next, the start of opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S1203), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). Here, when the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set, the large opening opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above is executed. The specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed under the conditions set in.

  On the other hand, if the specific effect is not started in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the specific effect is currently being performed (S1204). In addition, during a specific effect is the period when the specific effect is performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the audio | voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. In the process of S1204, when the specific effect is not being performed (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when the specific effect is being performed (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the opening / closing of 15 times of the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is completed (S1205).

  In the process of S1205, when the opening / closing of the 15 specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not completed (S1205: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the opening / closing of the 15th special winning opening (large opening) 65a is completed (S1205: Yes), the end of the specific effect is set (S1206), and the lottery result of this special symbol is “special” It is determined whether or not it is a “striking of the symbol” (S1207).

  In the processing of S1207, if the current special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning” (S1207: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e indicates “high probability state B of special symbol”. Then, the game state flag 203e is set (S1208), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "special symbol high probability state B", if the current special symbol lottery result is "special symbol hit", a specific effect At the end of, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery result is not “special symbol winning” (S1207: No), since the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol small hit”, the gaming state flag 203e is set. This process is terminated without changing, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32).

  When the specific effect is started by the specific effect control process shown in FIG. 34, the opening / closing conditions of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a around one round can be set, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be set. Can be set to open and close 15 rounds (15 times).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is performed by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). It is determined whether or not the power-off process (S1420) is started during the execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1417 in FIG. 36), it executes a power-off process in S1420. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1420 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1420 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1420, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process of this time is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1420, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1420 is executed (see S1419 in FIG. 36). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1420 is executed, the current startup process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1308. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1420 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1309), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1311), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1308 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1308 is performed via the processes of S1304 to S1306. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1309 is that when the process from S1304 to S1308 is reached via the process in S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1304. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. When this main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main process or the previous process of S1401 (S1401). If milliseconds have not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing S1402 to S1411. Whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the process of S1401 is a process related to execution of display (production) in S1402 to S1411, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1412, the special effect setting process of S1413, and the command determination process of S1414 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, the setting related to the changing effect can be performed without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. Further, by executing the processing of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, in the previous 1-msec cycle, various commands set by the processing of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1404). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a waiting-for-customer effect is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on the reserved lamp is performed according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1407). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the one reach production among the some reach productions with the frame button 22. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing ends, vibration sensor input monitoring processing is performed (S1408). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 by monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408), first, an output value (vibration level) is read from a vibration sensor (not shown) (S1501), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1502). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1502: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1502: Yes), it is determined that vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10, and a setting is made so that an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 226 (S1503). An error command for notifying the controller 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error is set (S1504), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 36). Thereby, in the display control apparatus 31, the process which displays the error message image which alert | reports a vibration error on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) is completed, a lamp editing process is then executed (S1409), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1410). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. Also, when an alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 37) (see S1503), an alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is sounded. Output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1410, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1409 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1410 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, the variable display setting process for setting the variable effect such as the display mode of the variable effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode of the stop display at the end of the change is executed (S1412). Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display setting process, the special effect setting process for setting the special effect such as executing the special effect in the third symbol display device 81 or ending the special effect being executed is executed (S1413). ). Details of the special effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the special effect setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1414 ends, the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is then updated (S1415), and the special effect lottery counter 223i is updated (S1416). The continuous notice lottery counter 223k is updated by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 127 every time the update process is performed, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). Further, the special effect lottery counter 223i is updated by incrementing one by one within the range of 0 to 149 every time the update process is performed, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 149). Then, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is referred to by a continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 39) described later, and is used to determine execution of the continuous notice effect. Further, the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is referred to by a special effect setting process (see FIG. 41) to be described later. Used for.

  When the processing of S1416 ends, it is then determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1417). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1417 (S1417: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1419) and the power interruption processing is executed (S1420). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1421), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1417 (S1417: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1418), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1418: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1418: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S1414) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113. This command determination process (S1414) executes a process according to the command received from main controller 110, as described above. In this process, when a stop type command is received from main controller 110, change start flag 223d is set to ON so that the setting of the change effect to be executed is started. Further, when a prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, the third symbol display device 81 determines whether or not to start the continuous notice effect.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1602), and the extracted variation pattern type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 223a2 (S1603). Then, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). In the process of S1602, any one of “special reach”, “super reach”, “normal reach”, “out of long”, and “out of short” is extracted as the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type stored here is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605). Then, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the extracted stop type is stored in the stop type storage area 223a1 in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1607). Then, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). In the processing of S1606, “15R probability big hit”, “15R normal big hit”, “crash hit”, “small hit”, “completely disengaged”, “front / rear disengagement reach (disengagement)”, “other than front / rear disengagement” Any one of “reach” is extracted as the stop type. The stop type extracted here is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1608: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (variable display). Is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609). In the process of S1609, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1609 ends, the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), every time a start winning is detected, the voice is processed by the processing of S1609. The value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110.

  In the processing of S1608, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1608: No), it is then determined whether or not a prefetch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1610). And when a prefetch command is received (S1610: Yes), from the received prefetch command, the lottery prediction result of the special symbol (presence / absence prediction result and stop type prediction result) and the variation pattern type are displayed. The prediction results are extracted and stored as pre-read information in the reserved area of the pre-read information storage area 223j (S1611). Then, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S1612), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, and the acquired Each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1 is stored in the reservation area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. When the main controller 110 stores data (respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) in the reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved area is separated from the original special symbol lottery. From the respective values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the table, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained when the original special symbol lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted).

  When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a prefetch command indicating various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern type) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, it extracts the prediction result of the special symbol lottery (prediction result of success / failure and the prediction result of the stop type) and the prediction result of the variation pattern type from the prefetch command. Then, they are stored as prefetch information in the hold area of the prefetch information storage area 223j.

  Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. In the continuous notice determination process, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, and the continuous notice lottery counter are displayed. Based on the value of 223k, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous notice effects with respect to the variable effects reserved at that time.

  If the prefetch command has not been received in the processing of S1610 (S1610: No), it is then determined whether or not a fanfare command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1613). If a fanfare command is received (S1613: Yes), a display fanfare command for starting a jackpot effect is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S1614), the process is terminated, and the main process described above is performed. Return to (see FIG. 36).

  The display fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. Sent to. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the processing of S1613 (S1613: No), it is next determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1615). When the round number command is received (S1615: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1616), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number ( In step S1617, the process ends, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. Sent to 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1615 (S1615: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1618). When an ending command is received (S1618: Yes), a display ending command for starting an ending effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 (S1619).

  The display ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1618 (S1618: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1620). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the continuous notice determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice determination process (S1612) executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 36). As described above, the continuous notice determination process (S1612) determines whether or not to start the continuous notice effect when the prefetch command is received.

  In this continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3), which are predetermined conditions described later, is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. If so, it is next determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. If it is determined here that the continuous notice effect is to be started, the continuous notice effect is started. S1702 to S1710, which will be described later, are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1711 to S1716, which will be described later, start a continuous notice effect. This is a process for determining whether or not to do so.

  Note that (Condition 1) is that execution of a continuous notice effect is not set, and (Condition 2) is that when all of the set continuous notice effects are completed, a special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot , Or 15R normal jackpot) "and between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the newly received prefetch command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. There are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls) (that is, the difference between the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is three or more) (condition 3 ) Becomes “out of special symbol” when all the set continuous notice effects are completed, and the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is out of the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command is “ Special figure Jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, or, 15R usually jackpot) is to be. "

  In the continuous notice determination process, first, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j (that is, the prediction result of the special symbol lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) is read (S1701). Note that the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j at the end is specified based on the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. That is, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 1, the pre-read information stored in the hold first area is specified as the pre-read information stored in the pre-read information storage area 223j. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 2, the pre-read information stored in the reserved second area is stored in the reserved third area when the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 3. When the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is 4, the prefetch information stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” in the pre-read information read out in the process of S1701 (S1702). When the prediction result of the symbol success / failure is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” (S1702: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “out of special symbol, special symbol small hit or special symbol hit probability” (S1702: No), the stop type read in the processing of S1701 It is determined whether the prediction result is “front / rear out of reach” (S 1703). In the processing of S1703, when the stop type prediction result is “front / rear out of reach (disconnection)” (S1703: Yes), the processing proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, when the stop type prediction result is not “front / rear out of reach (out)” but other stop types (S 1703: No), this process is terminated and the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). Return to).

  In the process of S1704, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is substituted for the variable A (S1704), and then the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is substituted for the variable B (S1705). Then, it is determined whether the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223l) is 0 (S1706). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1706: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is performed. Since it is not set and satisfies the above (Condition 1), the process proceeds to S1711, and it is determined whether to start the continuous notice effect by the process after S1711.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1706, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 223l) is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S1706: No), the execution of the continuous notice effect is already set. Therefore, it is then determined whether or not the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is on (S1707). As described above, when the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is ON, the game state after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set is “special”. When the symbol jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) state is indicated, and the value of the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is OFF, the continuous notice effect is set in all the changing effects. It shows that the gaming state after the fluctuating effect after the notice effect is performed becomes the “excluded special symbol” state.

  In the processing of S1707, when the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223m is on (S1707: Yes), when all the set continuous warning effects are finished, the special symbol jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, Or 15R normal jackpot) ", and the difference between the value of the variable A (ie, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b) and the value of the variable B (ie, the continuous notice number counter 223l) is calculated, The difference is substituted into variable C (S1708). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1709). As a result, when the variable C is 3 or more (S1709: Yes), the variable effect (holding) corresponding to the received prefetch command is determined. Sphere) and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is currently set is determined to be present. Therefore, since it can be determined from the results of the processing of S1706, the processing of S1707, and the processing of S1709 that the above (condition 2) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the processing of S1711, and the continuous notice effect is started by the processing after S1711. Decide whether or not to do.

  On the other hand, if the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) as a result of the processing of S1709 (S1709: No), the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuously present at this time. Since there are no two or more fluctuating effects (holding spheres) with the last fluctuating effect (holding sphere) for which the execution of the notice effect is set, the processing of S1706, the processing of S1707, and the processing of S1709 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above-described (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the present process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect.

  In the processing of S1707, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223m is on (S1707: Yes), when all the set continuous warning effects are finished, the special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or , 15R normal jackpot) ”, the“ special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) ”temporarily interrupts the player's expectation due to the continuous notice effect. However, if (Condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the variation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last variation effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. On the other hand, if there are two or more fluctuating effects (holding balls), it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, in the two or more variable effects performed after “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” The chance eye can always be displayed as a stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous notice effect, or to enhance the sense of expectation that the player feels about the continuous notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1707, if the value of the post-notification jackpot flag 223m is OFF (S1707: No), it becomes “out of special symbol” when all the set continuous announcement effects are finished. Therefore, it is further determined whether or not the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is correct is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” in the pre-read information read out in S1701 (S1710). If the prediction result of special symbol success / failure is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” (S1710: Yes), among the pre-read information read in the processing of S1701, Since the prediction result of the symbol success / failure is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)”, the results of the processing in S1706, the processing in S1707, and the processing in S1709 are described above (condition 3). ). Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1711, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect by the processes after S1711.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1710, when the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “disappearance of special symbol, small hit of special symbol, or hit of special symbol” (S1710: No), the processing of S1707 From the results of the processing of S1708 and the processing of S1711, it can be determined that none of the above-described (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process is terminated without determining the start of the continuous notice effect, and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). Here, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (S1707: No), it becomes “exclusion of special symbol” when all the set continuous notice effects are finished. In such a situation, in the prefetch information extracted from the newly received prefetch command, the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” For a limited time, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, so the continuous notice effect that is being executed ends and becomes `` exclusion of special symbol ''. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the state of “exclusion of special symbol” continuously after the end of the continuous notice effect. In addition, after the end of the continuous notice effect, it is expected that the player will be a “special symbol jackpot (15R probable big hit or 15R normal jackpot)” if the continuous notice effect is continued and the player continues to make a special notice effect. A feeling can be given strongly and the motivation which continues a game can be given with respect to a player.

  Thus, in the processing of S1702 to S1710, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is determined. If not satisfied, the continuous notice determination process is terminated and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). As a result, when none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the process after S1711 for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is not executed, so the start of the continuous notice effect is determined reliably and easily. You can prevent it from being broken. In addition, since the processing after S1711 is omitted, an increase in processing load in the sound lamp control device 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the processes of S1711 to S1713, the continuous notice is selected from the two continuous notice determination tables 222d (the special notice jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d or the special symbol removal consecutive notice determination table 222d). A continuous notice determination table (see FIG. 13) used to determine the start of the production is selected.

  First, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is the “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” in the pre-read information read in the process of S1701 ( S1711). If the prediction result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” (S1711: Yes), a continuous notice determination table used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect. Then, the special notice jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d is selected (S1712). On the other hand, if the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “out of special symbol, special symbol small hit, or special symbol hit probability” (S1711: No), continuous notice used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect. As the determination table, the continuous notice determination table 222d for removing special symbols is selected (S1713).

  If the continuous notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1711 to S1713, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is acquired (S1714). Then, the continuous notice determination table selected in the process of S1712 or the process of S1713 (the continuous notice determination table 222d for special symbol jackpot or the continuous notice determination table 222d for losing the special symbol), and the special symbol holding ball The continuous notice determination range is identified based on the value of the number counter 223b (the number N of the variable display hold), and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice lottery counter 223k (S1715).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is included in the continuous notice determination range, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous notice effect (S1716). In the process of S1716, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is not included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is not started (S1716: No), the process after S1717 is skipped, and the above-described command Returning to the determination process (see FIG. 38). That is, the setting of the continuous notice count counter 223l is held as it is. Accordingly, when there is a holding ball set to perform a fluctuating effect notice, a continuous notice effect is performed for the reserved ball, and when such a reserved ball does not exist, a continuous notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1716, when it is determined that the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is included in the continuous notice determination range and the continuous notice effect is started (S1716: Yes), the number of special symbol holding balls in the continuous notice number counter 223l. The value of the counter 223b is set (S1717). Here, by setting the value of the held ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice number counter 223l by the processing of S1717, all the changed effects held before the changed effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously displayed. Execution of the notice effect is set. In other words, chances can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuating effects corresponding to the reserved ball held before the reserved ball corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is correct is “special symbol jackpot (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” in the pre-read information read in the processing of S1701 (S1718). Then, if the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “big hit (15-probable big hit or 15R normal big hit)” (S1718: Yes), the post-notice jackpot flag 223m is set to ON (S1719), and this processing is performed. To return to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, if the prediction result of whether or not the special symbol is successful is “out of special symbol, special symbol small hit, or special symbol winning hit” (S1718: No), the post-notice big hit flag 223m is set off. (S1720), this process ends, and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38).

  When all the set continuous notice effects are completed by the processing of S1719 or S1720, whether or not the special symbol jackpot (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) or “special symbol It can be set in the post-notice big hit flag 223m whether it is “off, special symbol small hit, or special symbol big hit”. As a result, when the continuous notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1707 is executed, the value of the post-notice big hit flag 223m set here is used (condition 2) or (condition 3) described above. It can be determined whether or not the above is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1412) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113. The variation display setting process (S1412) is a process for setting the variation effect such as the display mode of the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode of the stop display at the end of the variation.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main controller 110. Since this is not the state, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the stop type and variation are changed from the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. The pattern type is acquired (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probable big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (S1804), and the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probable big hit”, Or, when it is “15R normal jackpot” (S1804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol” (S1805).

  In the process of S1805, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates “high probability state A or B of special symbol” (S1805: No), the process proceeds to S1808. On the other hand, when the game state flag 223c indicates a state other than the “low probability state of special symbol” (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the small hit after change number counter 223h is 100 or less (S1806). .

  In the process of S1806, when the value of the small hit after change number counter 223h exceeds 100 (S1806: No), the process proceeds to S1808. On the other hand, if the value of the counter change number after hit 223h is 100 or less (S1806: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S1807).

  In the process of S1807, when the special effect flag 223e is on (S1807: Yes), the display mode of the variable effect to be executed is determined as “Janken effect E” (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1818. To do. In S1810, when the display mode of the variation effect is determined to be “Janken Effect E”, the character representing the player (your side) loses to the Janken in the variation effect, but the effect of finally winning is performed. . On the other hand, when the special effect flag 223e is off (S1807: No), the process proceeds to S1808. In the processing of S1808, the special symbol jackpot effect pattern table 222c (see FIG. 10A) is compared with the variation pattern type acquired in the processing of the counterfeit continuous number counter 223f and S1803 (S1808).

  Of the display modes stipulated in the special symbol jackpot effect pattern table 222c, the display mode corresponding to the condition of the variation pattern type acquired in the processing of the sudden success counter 223f and S1803 is to be executed. The display mode of the effect is determined (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1818. In the process of S1809, for example, when the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is normal reach (20 seconds), the variation effect to be executed is “no janken effect” regardless of the value of the continuity counter 223f. decide. Further, when the value of the sudden success count counter 223f is 1 and the variation pattern type acquired in the processing of S1803 is super reach (90 seconds), the “junken effect B” is determined as the variation effect to be executed. . In S1809, when the display mode of the variation effect is determined as “Janken productions A to D”, in the variation production, the character representing the player (self side) wins the game.

  In the process of S1804, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not “15R probable big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (S1804: No), the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “probable” It is determined whether it is “winning” (S1811). In the process of S1811, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “Collision” (S1811: Yes), 1 is converted into the continuity counter 223f (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1815. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1811, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not “coincidence” (S1811: No), it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “small hit” ( S1813). In the process of S1813, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “small hit” (S1813: Yes), the process proceeds to S1815.

  Further, in the process of S1813, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not “small hit” (S1813: No), the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “disappeared (completely out, out of front / rear reach, out of front / back). Other than reach) ”. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 2 or more (S1814). In the process of S1814, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 2 or more (S1814: Yes), the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, so the display of the change effect to be executed is displayed. The mode is set to “chance eye effect” (S1817), and the process proceeds to S1818.

  When the process of S1818 is executed, the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 in the process of S1821 described later. Thus, chances (the symbols on the middle line L2 are set to “3”, “4”, “1” in order from the left symbol row Z1). Thereby, the stop symbol used as the chance chance can be displayed as the continuous notice effect when the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1814, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is less than 2 (S1814: No), when the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (in the continuous notice number counter 223l). The value is 1) or the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 0). In this case, the process proceeds to S1815.

  In the process of S1815, the special pattern removal effect pattern table 222c (see FIG. 10B) is compared with the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 (S1815). Then, among the display modes stipulated in the special pattern removal effect pattern table 222c, the display mode corresponding to the condition of the variation pattern type acquired in the processing of S1803 is determined as the display mode of the variation effect to be executed. (S1816), and the process proceeds to S1818. In the process of S1816, for example, when the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is out of the short range (5 seconds), the variation effect that “no janken effect” should be executed regardless of the value of the continuity counter 223f. Determine as. If the variation pattern type acquired in the processing of S1803 is super reach (90 seconds), the “junken effect A” is determined as the variation effect to be executed regardless of the value of the continuity counter 223f. In S1816, even if the display mode of the variation effect is determined to be “Janken Effect A”, the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, so in the variation effect, the character representing the player (self side) The production will be defeated by Janken.

  Further, when the process of S1816 is executed, in the process of S1821 described later, the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set to the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control device 110. Instead, it is set to “reaching where reach occurs (rear-rear reach or reach other than front-rear reach)”.

  In the processing of S1818, it is determined whether or not the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1818), and when the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1818: Yes), 1 is added to the small hitting after change number counter 223h. Then (S1819), the process proceeds to S1820. On the other hand, when the after-hit flag 223g is off (S1818: No), the process of S1819 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1820.

  In the process of S1820, based on the display mode of the variable display determined in the process of S1809, S1810, S1816, or S1817, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated and the command is displayed. Setting is made for transmission to the control device 114 (S1820). When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the display manner of the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. In addition, display control is performed.

  Next, based on the stop type acquired in the processing of S1803, a display stop type command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1821). . When the process of S1816 is executed and “Janken effect A” is determined as the variable effect to be executed, the stop type is replaced with the display stop type command indicating the stop type acquired in the process of S1803. A display stop type command indicating that “reach occurs (rearward / rearward reach or reach other than forward / rearward)” is generated. When the process of S1817 is executed, a display stop type command indicating that the stop type is an opportunity is generated instead of the display stop type command indicating the stop type acquired in the process of S1803. . When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Control the display.

  When the processing of S1821 is completed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1822), and the data stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j is shifted (S1823). In the process of S1823, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the prefetch information storage area 223j to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted (moved) such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. ).

  When the processing of S1823 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 1 or more (S1824). If the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 1 or more (S1824: Yes), the value of the continuous notice count counter 223l is decremented by 1 (S1825), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 0 (S1824: No), the process of S1825 is skipped, the process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

  When the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol” and the variable symbol display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 by the variation display setting process shown in FIG. Regardless, according to the variation pattern type of the variation display, any one of “no janken production, janken production A” can be determined as the display mode of the variation display.

  More specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)”. For example, “Janken production A” can be executed in the variation display. That is, when the special symbol lottery result is “excluded from special symbol” and the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the “junken effect A” is performed regardless of the value of the counterfeit consecutive number counter 223f. Can be determined as the display mode of the fluctuating effect.

  As described above, in the period from the last “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. Although it is a counter that counts the number of times, the display mode of the fluctuating effect is determined irrespective of the sudden success count counter 223f.

  Therefore, the player cannot recognize the number of times that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol win” from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player cannot grasp the gaming state in which the special symbol lottery (disconnection of the special symbol) was made this time. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the special The player can have a strong sense of expectation that the symbol lottery result will be a “special symbol jackpot”.

  40, the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot (15-probable variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)”, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation display. When it is performed, any one of “no janken effect, janken effects A to E” can be determined as the display mode of the variable display, depending on the variable pattern type of the variable display and the value of the continuity count counter 223f. .

  More specifically, when the special symbol lottery results in “special symbol jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” and the variable symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation If the display variation type is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)” and the value of the continuity count counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variation display is “Janken production A”. Further, the display mode can be determined so that the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken. Similarly, if the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined as “Janken effect B”, and if the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variable effect is changed. If “Janken production C” is determined and the value of the counter value of continuous continuation counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the variation production is decided to be “Janken production D”, and the characters representing the respective players (self side) are The display mode can be determined so as to win.

  As described above, in the period from the last “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode of the variable display (the type of the janken effect) is determined by the value of the sudden succession number of times counter 223f.

  Thus, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, if the player pays attention to the type of “janken production” executed in the third symbol display device 81, the previous “special event” It is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special hit of special symbol” from “special jackpot” to the current “special jackpot”. Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot” after that, the player displays the variation effect. It can be understood in what gaming state the special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made according to the mode (that is, the type of janken production).

  Hereinafter, an example of contents that can be grasped by the player will be specifically described. As described above, the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken effect A”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the Janken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become the “special symbol winning” even once between the “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results between the previous “Special design jackpot” and the current “Special symbol jackpot” are either “Special design miss” or “Special design jackpot”. In any case, this means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult for the player to grasp, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs variable display, the display mode is “Janken effect A”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the most recent gaming state in which it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player understands that each specific performance performed during the difficult period including the case where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is due to “special design small hits”. it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for about the 100th time. Then, although the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains “the low probability state of the special symbol”, and the winning probability is low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when the special symbol lottery is made for the 100th time, fortunately, there is a possibility that the lottery result of this special symbol may have become a “special symbol jackpot”. is there.

  In addition, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30). ) However, if it is not easy to win and this special symbol drawing is done, there may be a doubt that the special symbol lottery result will be a “special symbol jackpot” .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production A”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, Fortunately, although the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lottery result of this special symbol is “special symbol jackpot” Can be understood. Thus, if the predictions are correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her thoughts were correct. Further, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has been lucky in the situation where the winning probability is low.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode is “Janken production B” and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol winning” once during the period from the “big bonus” to the “special symbol jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, a variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken effect B”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol sudden hit” once between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, including the case where the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of any special symbol among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third) is “special symbol” There is a high risk of doubting that it may have been a “good hit”. That is, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30). Therefore, there is a high risk of doubt that the result of this special symbol lottery may have been a “special jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production B”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the janken, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that a “special symbol jackpot” has been made immediately after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol big hit” twice from the “big jackpot” to the “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs variable display, and the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol hit” twice between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special jackpot”. . In addition, the player is responsible for “special symbol hits” twice in each of the specific effects performed within the difficult period of time, including when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult to grasp. It can be grasped that the others were due to "special bonuses".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol may have become “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that a “special symbol jackpot” has been made immediately after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  In addition, the player may receive a special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special hit of special symbol” twice.

  As described above, “special symbol wins” is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but if it is determined to be “special jackpot”, the probability of “special symbol hits” is , “1/6”. On the other hand, the probability of “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” is “1/3”, and the probability of “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” is “1/2”. Thus, when the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, it is determined that the “special symbol 15R probability jackpot” or “the special symbol 15R normal jackpot” is determined rather than the “special symbol jackpot”. Is more likely to be determined.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become a “special symbol jackpot”, including a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can no longer be grasped, It is a little disappointing that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special hit of the special symbol” twice. As described above, by executing the “junken effect” in the third symbol display device 81, the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, This means that the lottery result of the special symbol has reached the “special symbol big hit” three times or more from the “big jackpot” to the current “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult for the player to grasp, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display, and the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player understands that the lottery result of the special symbol has been more than three times in the “special symbol big hit” between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. it can. Also, at least three times of the specific effects executed within the difficult period of time, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player is based on “a special symbol hit” It can be understood that the others were due to "small bonuses for special symbols".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for several times (for example, the fourth).

  Then, as described above, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the fourth), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have the satisfaction that the game game has become a “special jackpot” as soon as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  In addition, the player may receive a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth), including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special symbol hit” at least three times.

  As described above, “special symbol wins” is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but if it is determined to be “special jackpot”, the probability of “special symbol hits” is , “1/6”. That is, there is a higher probability of being determined as “a special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “a special symbol 15R normal jackpot” than being determined as “special symbol jackpot”.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become a “special symbol jackpot”, including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can no longer be grasped, among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the fourth), I am very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol has been "special hits" more than once. As described above, by executing the “junken effect” in the third symbol display device 81, the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (your side) wins the opponent's character, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become the “special hit of the special symbol” between the special symbol jackpot and the current “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results between the previous “Special design jackpot” and the current “Special symbol jackpot” are either “Special design miss” or “Special design jackpot”. In any case, this means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. Further, it means that the lottery of special symbols has not exceeded 100 times since the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, a variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins over the opponent's character, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in a “special symbol low probability state”. In addition, the player, once the special symbol lottery result is "special symbol small hit", and then the special symbol lottery result does not become "surprise hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. In addition, the player understands that each specific performance performed during the difficult period including the case where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is due to “special design small hits”. it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for about the 100th time.

  Then, as described above, although the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the winning probability is not changed. If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then the special symbol lottery is made about the 100th time, fortunately, the special symbol lottery result may have become a “special symbol jackpot”. There is a risk of doubt.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “special symbol high probability state B”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, it was 1/30), but it was hard to win, and when the special symbol drawing was made this time, I was wondering if the special symbol lottery finally became a “special symbol jackpot” There is a risk of holding.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the opponent character. The player is lucky, although the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol of You can see that it was a big hit. Thus, if the predictions are correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her thoughts were correct.

  Also, the player can grasp that the special symbol jackpot has been reached by the time the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he has won in a situation where the winning probability is low and a satisfaction that he has been lucky.

  Further, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Then, in the special symbol lottery for the third time (for example, the third time), it is assumed that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”.

  Then, as described above, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, The player is greatly different from the expectation, and although the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), fortunately the lottery result of the special symbol is “ You can see that it was a special symbol jackpot.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. Under circumstances, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very fortunate to be elected in a very rare situation, and very fortunate, although his thoughts were greatly different.

  Note that in the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation described above occurs, the player cannot grasp the situation. Therefore, for example, since the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), the player has a lottery result of the special symbol “ I thought it would have been a “special design jackpot” and sometimes it ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super” when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”. If “reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, any one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variable display. And it is comprised so that it may alert | report to a player how the big symbol of this special symbol was made | formed according to the kind of the executed janken production.

  Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol smash hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol If the lottery result is a special symbol jackpot, the player can determine what game state this special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made according to the type of “Janken production”. I can grasp. Therefore, even if the player has a question about what circumstances (for example, the gaming status at the time of the lottery, etc.), the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot” The question can be solved. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player continues discomfort, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. As a result, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is temporarily set. Becomes “a special symbol hit” or “a special symbol small hit”, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once becomes “ ”Or“ special symbol small hit ”, it is not difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “successful hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high of special symbol” From “probability state A” to “high probability state B of special symbol”. On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “small hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in the “high probability state A of special symbol”.

  Therefore, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, once the lottery result of the special symbol “successful hit of special symbol” ”Or“ special symbol small hit ”, and even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player is able to change the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to the“ high probability state A or B ”. Therefore, in this case, the player is less likely to be questioned as to what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured as follows. And, according to the type of janken production that has been executed, the player is informed of how the special symbol of this time was a big hit, but during the jackpot production, "Janken production AE" is executed May be. Further, the effect to be executed may not be “Janken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of “Janken effects A to E” is associated with the value of the continuity counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  Next, the special effect setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1413) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113. The special effect setting process (S1413) is a process for setting the special effect such as executing the special effect in the third symbol display device 81 or ending the special effect being executed.

  In the special effect setting process, first, the stop type is acquired from the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a (S1901). Next, it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the end timing of the specific effect is reached (S1902). In the process of S1902, when it is the end timing of the specific effect (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “Collision” (S1903).

  In the process of S1903, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “Success” (S1903: Yes), the game state flag is set so that the game state flag 223c indicates “high probability state B of special symbol”. 223c is set (S1904), and the process proceeds to S1906.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1903, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not “coincidence” (S1903: No), the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “small hit”. In this case, the after-hit flag 223g is set to ON (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906.

  Further, in the process of S1902, if it is not the end timing of the specific effect (S1902: No), it is determined whether the variable effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 and is the end timing of the variable effect. (S1909).

  In the process of S1909, when it is not the end timing of the fluctuating effect (S1909: No), the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are currently performing the jackpot effect, It is determined whether it is the end timing (S1910). In the process of S1910, when it is not the end timing of the jackpot effect (S1910: No), this process is terminated without doing anything, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is the end timing of the jackpot effect (S1910: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “15R probability variation jackpot” (S1911).

  In the process of S1911, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “15R probable big hit” (S1911: Yes), the game state flag 223c is set to indicate “high probability state A of special symbol”. The status flag 223c is set (S1912). Then, the “back image for high probability” is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1913), and the process proceeds to S1916.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1911, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not “15R probable big hit” (S1911: No), the stop type is “15R normal big hit”. In this case, the gaming state flag 223c is set so that the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol” (S1914). Then, a “short-time rear image” is applied as a rear image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1915), and the process proceeds to S1916.

  In the process of S1916, the sudden success count counter 223f and the small hit after change count counter 223h are cleared (S1916). Next, the after-hit flag 223g is set to OFF (S1917), and the process proceeds to S1919. In the process of S1909, when it is the end timing of the fluctuating effect (S1909: Yes), the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “disappearance (complete disengagement, reach out of front / rear out, reach other than out of front / rear out)”. Is determined (S1921).

  In the process of S1921, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not “out (completely out, reach out of front / rear out, reach other than out of front / back)” (S1919: No), the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “ It is determined whether or not the winning hit or small hit is made (S1931). In the process of S1931, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “surprise or small hit” (S1931: Yes), a specific effect start command is set (S1932), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

  The specific effect start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the specific effect start command, the display control device 114 performs a display (specific effect) on the third symbol display device 81 indicating that it is in the second special game state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1931, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not “surprise or small hit” (S1931: No), this process ends and the main process described above (see FIG. 36). Return to).

  In the process of S1921, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is “disengagement (complete disengagement, reach out of front / rear out, reach other than out of front / rear out)” (S1921: Yes), whether or not the special effect being executed is ended. In other words, it is a case where it is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once ended.

  In this case, first, it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S1922). In the processing of S1922, when the special effect flag 223e is on (S1922: Yes), the special effect is currently being executed. In this case, the special effect end determination table 222a (see FIG. 12A) is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i (S1929) to determine whether or not the special effect being executed is to be ended. .

  As described above, the special effect end determination table 222a is a table for determining whether or not to end the special effect when the special effect is being executed. In the special effect end determination table 222a, three random values for determining the end of the special effect are determined, and the range is “0 to 2”. Note that the range of the random number value does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol. The total number of random values that can be taken by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 from “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which the end of the special effect is determined is 3. The probability that the production will end is “1/50”.

  In the process of S1929, the random number value determined in the special effect end determination table 222a is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i, and when they match, it is determined that the special effect being executed is ended. Then, as a result of the comparison in the process of S1929, it is determined whether or not it is determined to end the special effect being executed (S1930). In the process of S1930, when it is not determined to end the special effect being executed (S1930: No), the special effect being executed is continued. In this case, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. On the other hand, in the process of S1930, when it is determined that the special effect being executed is to be ended (S1930: Yes), the process proceeds to S1918.

  In addition, in the process of S1922, when the special effect flag 223e is off (S1922: No), the value of the counter change number counter 223h after the small hit is determined in order to determine whether or not the special effect is once ended. Or, the game state flag 223c is confirmed. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the after-hit variation number counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923), and when the value of the after-hit variation number counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to S1925. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, if the value of the counter change number after hits 223h is not 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923: No), whether the gaming state flag 223c indicates “high probability state B of special symbol”? Is determined (S1924).

  In the process of S1924, when the gaming state flag 223c does not indicate “special symbol high probability state B” (S1924: No), the process proceeds to S1927. On the other hand, in the process of S1924, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates “high probability state B of special symbol” (S1924: Yes), the process proceeds to S1925. In the process of S1925, the special effect resumption determination table 222b (see FIG. 12B) is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i (S1925), and it is determined whether or not the special effect that has once ended is restarted. To do.

  As described above, the special effect resumption determination table 222b is a table for determining whether or not to resume the special effect once ended after the special effect is once ended. In the special effect resumption determination table 222b, five random values for determining the resumption of the special effect are determined, and the range is “50 to 54”. Note that the range of the random value does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol. The total number of random values that the special effect lottery counter 223i can take is 150 from “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values that are determined to resume the special effect is 5. The probability that the production is resumed is “1/30”.

  In the process of S1925, the random number value determined in the special effect resumption determination table 222b is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i, and when they match, it is determined that the special effect once ended is restarted. Then, as a result of the comparison by the process of S1925, it is determined whether or not it is determined to resume the special effect once finished (S1926). In the process of S1926, when it is not determined to resume the special effect once ended (S1926: No), the state where the special effect is ended is continued. In this case, the process proceeds to S1927.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1926, when it is determined that the special effect that has once ended is restarted (S1926: Yes), the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, the “back image for special effect” is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1906), and the back image change indicating the type of the applied back image is performed. A command is set (S1907).

  The rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to “a back image for special effects”.

  When the “back image for special effects” is applied here, the lighting and blinking patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226 (refer to FIG. 5). The sound (music) output from () is also changed according to the “back image for special effects”. As a result, the “back image for high probability”, the “back image for short time”, and the “back image for low probability” are different from those displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Production is performed. When the process of S1907 is completed, the special effect flag 223e is set to ON (S1908), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  Then, in the process of S1927, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 223c indicates the “high probability state B of special symbol” or whether the after-hit flag 223g is on (S1927). In the process of S1927, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates “special symbol high probability state B”, or when the after-hit flag 223g is on (S1927: Yes), this process ends. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1927, when the gaming state flag 223c does not indicate the “high probability state B of special symbol” and the after-hit flag 223g is off (S1927: No), the pachinko machine 10 In step S1928, it is determined whether or not the “normal symbol time-short state” has ended because the predetermined number of fluctuations has ended. In the process of S1928, if the “normal symbol time-short state” has not ended because the predetermined number of fluctuations has ended (S1928: No), this process ends and the main process described above (see FIG. 36). Return to.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1928, when the “normal symbol time-short state” is completed because the predetermined number of fluctuations is completed (S1928: Yes), the process proceeds to S1918. In the process of S1918, the “back image for low probability” is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1918), and the process proceeds to S1919. In the process of S1919, a back image change command indicating the type of the back image applied in the process of S1913, the process of S1915, or the process of S1918 is set (S1919).

  The rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the type of back image indicated by the back image change command.

  For example, if the “back image for high probability” is applied in the process of S1913, the lighting and blinking patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the sound output device (speaker not shown) 226 ( The sound (music) output from (see FIG. 5) is also changed to one corresponding to the “back image for high probability”. As a result, an effect different from the case where the “back image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The same applies to not only the “back image for high probability” but also the “back image for short time” and “back image for low probability”. When the process of S1919 ends, the special effect flag 223e is set to OFF (S1920), the process ends, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  When the special effect is set in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 by the special effect setting process shown in FIG. 41 and the specific effect ends, the third symbol display is performed. In the device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the special effect can be started. That is, the “back image for special effects” can be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If a special jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 in a state where the special effect is being executed, the special effect that was being executed is ended there. To do.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the big hit effect is finished, a back image corresponding to the big hit type is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. it can. Specifically, if the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, the “back image for high probability” can be displayed. Further, when the jackpot type is “15R normal jackpot”, the “back image for time reduction” can be displayed.

  Further, when the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the special effect has a probability of “1/50” when the variable effect ends. Can be terminated once. That is, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from “back image for special effects” to “back image for low probability”. In addition, after the special effect is once ended, when the variable effect is ended in the third symbol display device 81, the value of the small hit after change number counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less, or the game state flag 223c is set. If the “special symbol high probability state B” is indicated, the special effect can be resumed with a probability of “1/30”. That is, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from “a back image for low probability” to “a back image for special effects”.

  In addition, when the special effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the special effect is not finished once, the variable effect is finished. If the “normal symbol time-short state” ends because the predetermined number of fluctuations has ended, the rear image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from “time-short time rear image” to “low”. It can be changed to “Back image for probability”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effects (including the display of the back image) executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect so as not to bore the player.

  In this embodiment, the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect once ended is restarted at the timing when the change effect ends. It may be ended or the special effect once ended may be resumed. In other words, if the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect once ended is restarted at the execution unit of the variable effect, it may be ended at any time or restarted at any time.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 55. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 42). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 43, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 53A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 53A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 17 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 44B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 has been received, that is, when a display variation pattern command has been received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 44B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, back and forth reach, back and forth The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to reach other than miss, complete miss, chance chance) are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49, details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 45, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2505 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display stop type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (15R probability variable big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out reach, complete outreach, chance out of the chance indicated by the display stop type command (S2601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 44B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2603, stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / rear out, complete out, any chance) ) Is a jackpot stop type (S2604). If it is a jackpot stop type (S2604: Yes), transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started when it is in the on state. The fanfare data transfer flag 223i notified to the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) is set to ON (S2605), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if the stop type information is not the jackpot stop type (S2604: No), the process of S2605 is skipped, the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on this fanfare data transfer flag 223i, image data to be used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the large effect change effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be transferred. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  The display fanfare command for instructing the start of the fanfare effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is completed, so that the display fanfare command is received. Therefore, if the image data used in the fanfare effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a lot of waiting time is generated from the end of the change effect until the fanfare effect is started, and the player can operate. There was a risk of anxiety about whether it was stopped or a sense of incongruity.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device In 81, control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is completed before the fluctuating effect that is a big hit is completed. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Big jackpot” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special jackpot” and reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. there were. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is a fanfare command for use (S2408: Yes), the fanfare command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. This fanfare command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command processing, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the fanfare command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2704, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, The drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, and the contents of one frame image to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2702. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the sprite required in the set fanfare display data table is stored in the character ROM 2 in advance. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the fanfare command process is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the fanfare effect until the start of the round effect. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 15 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that time until the jackpot variation display is finished in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. As a result, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the fanfare effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. Thereby, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 is finished, the fanfare effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player is concerned whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display fanfare command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). If there is a round number command for use (S2410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47B, details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. The table buffer 233d is set (S2801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2410 that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412). If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S2413), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Details of the ending command process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, Data table discrimination flags corresponding to other ending display data tables are set to OFF (S2903). In the display setting process, the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the ending effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2903. Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2412 that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414). If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49A, details of the rear image change command process (S2415) will be described. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3503) of a back image change accompanying reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S3001). .

  Then, the rear image type is extracted from the rear image change command (S3002). In the processing of S3002, there are four types of “back image for high probability”, “back image for time reduction”, “back image for special effect”, and “back image for low probability”. Any one is extracted from the inside. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type extracted from the back image change command is turned on, and other back image type Is set to OFF (S3003), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3003. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is defined that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the task image processing is performed based on the back image discrimination flag set in S3003. The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S3003, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2414 that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2416), and there is an error command. If (S2416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S3102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2418), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the fluctuation pattern command process (see FIG. 46A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 46B), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 46A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2502, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, the details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3202), S3203 to S3204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed. In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process (S3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required. In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205. In S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205).

  Here, the details of the pointer update processing (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content acquired in the processing of S3206 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3208: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed, and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of on in the processing of S3209 (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3216). If the demo display flag is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S3217), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  If the demonstration display flag is on in the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 17B and 17C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3602). In the process of S3602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3602 (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3601, even when a transfer instruction for untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 44B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 45 to 49) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) (see S3501: No in FIG. 53A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3706, after an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3706 (S3706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the processing in S3705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the processing proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), it is then determined whether or not the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709).

  If the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 45). As a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is changed. This means that it is determined that the jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, the control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect that is a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set to off (S3710), and then image data used in the fanfare effect is set as transfer target image data (S3711). Furthermore, the top address (storage source top address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data used in the fanfare effect and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are acquired. (S3712), the process proceeds to S3717.

  In the process of S3709, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but is off (S3709: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3713). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3713: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3714), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3715). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3716), and the process proceeds to S3717.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3715, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3717, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3717). The determination in the process of S3717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j and the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3717 (S3717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3717 (S3717: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3718). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3718, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3719), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information required for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 44B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins (start win) in the first entrance 64, the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new start win. , CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the main controller 110. After that, when the data stored in the reserved area is shifted to the execution area, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the shifted data.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery is performed and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol 15R probability big hit” or “special symbol 15R normal big hit”, the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol In the three-symbol display device 81, a variable display is made, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation big hit”, “special symbol 15R It is possible to recognize whether it is “normal jackpot”. Further, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the first special gaming state is ended according to the lottery result.

  Then, when the stop display is made, it is confirmed that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the big hit (first special gaming state) of 15 rounds, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state. The display shown (a jackpot effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the first special game state, the main controller 110 performs control so that the above-described “first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” is executed.

  And, when the special symbol lottery result is “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol”, when the first special gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to “high probability state A of special symbol” In the third symbol display device 81, the “back image for high probability” is displayed. On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery result is “15R special jackpot of special symbol”, when the first special gaming state is ended, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and “normal symbol of The state shifts to “time reduction state”, and “back image for time reduction” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the lottery result of the special symbol by paying attention to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the player can recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is performed and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol big hit” or “special symbol small hit”, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol A variable display is made on the display device 81, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. However, among the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol indicating the hit of the special symbol is similar to the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol. Further, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol big hit” or “special symbol small hit”, the third symbol display device 81 displays the same third symbol (that is, reach) The generated “separate special symbol”) is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small” It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a “win”.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state. The display (specific effect) which shows this is performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Further, during the second special game state, the main controller 110 performs control so that the above-described “second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a” is executed.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning”, when the second special gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the “special symbol high probability state B”, A “rear image for special effects” is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol small hit”, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at the current state even when the second special game state being executed ends. In the third symbol display device 81, the “back image for special effects” is displayed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, and the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it becomes difficult to recognize the lottery result of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine It becomes difficult to recognize 10 game states.

  Further, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result of the special symbol is “exclusion of special symbol”, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time. After the elapse of time, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, after the stop display is performed, the above-described jackpot effect or the specific effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 or the fact that the effect is not executed after the stop display, the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be recognized that it is “out of design”. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the player can grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change.

  Therefore, when the player is able to grasp the gaming state (high probability state, low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 and the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the player It is possible to grasp that the grasping game state continues. On the other hand, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol wins” or “special symbol small hit”, and it is difficult to recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol” ”, The player cannot grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first place, and therefore cannot continue to grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, this pachinko machine 10 has the same specific effect in the same way regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol hit”. It is configured to be executed. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed in accordance with the specific effect is also configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific performance or the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol winning” or “special symbol small hit” Become.

  Here, the reason why the player is configured to make it difficult to recognize whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit”.

  In conventional pachinko machines, there are only three special symbol lottery results: the above-mentioned “special symbol probable jackpot”, the above “special symbol normal jackpot”, and the above “extra special symbol”. It wasn't. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “a low probability state of a special symbol”, the game is likely to be monotonous.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the gaming state of the pachinko machine is changed only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol probable big hit” or “special symbol normal big hit”. Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “exclusion of special symbol”, the player can easily grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine has not changed. Therefore, if the game state of the pachinko machine is “special symbol low probability state”, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “exclusion of special symbol”, the player can easily continue to have a low probability of winning. Can grasp.

  Also, in the case of a pachinko machine, if the game state of the pachinko machine is “special symbol low probability state” and a special symbol is drawn, for example, with a probability of 1/300, “special symbol jackpot (special symbol probability change). The winning probability is set so as to be “a jackpot, a normal jackpot of a special symbol”. On the other hand, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “high probability state of special symbol”, when a special symbol lottery is made, for example, with a probability of 1/30, “special symbol jackpot (special symbol probable big hit, special symbol The winning probability is set so that “the normal big hit of Therefore, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “low probability state of special symbol”, if a special symbol lottery is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is often “out of special symbol”.

  Therefore, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine is “low probability state of special symbol”, even if the special symbol lottery is made, the player will receive a special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot I couldn't have a strong sense of expectation that it would be “a special jackpot for special designs”. Therefore, it was easy for the game to become monotonous.

  Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, “special hits for special symbols” and “small hits for special symbols” are provided as special symbol lottery results. As a result, when the game state of the pachinko machine is “low probability state of special symbol”, even if the special symbol lottery is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as “special symbol jackpot (special symbol probable change). It has become possible to have a strong expectation that it will be a “big hit, a special jackpot for special symbols”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the first symbol display device 37 and the special symbol lottery result 37 regardless of whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small hit”. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a similar stop display. Moreover, it is comprised so that the same specific production may be performed similarly. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed in accordance with the specific effect is also configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display, the specific effect, and the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” or “special symbol small hit”. It becomes difficult to recognize.

  Further, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”, but the special symbol of When the lottery result is “special symbol small hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. In addition, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of the special symbol”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as in the case of the “high probability state A of the special symbol”. , "Normal state short time state" does not become. Therefore, in this state, even if the normal symbol lottery is made and the “normal symbol hit” is made, as in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “the low probability state of the special symbol”, “ Control is performed so that the “second opening / closing operation of the electric accessory” is performed. That is, both when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol”, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance Works similarly.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player can grasp the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit”. Or, when the “special symbol small hit” is reached, the player can play the game of the pachinko machine 10 until the special symbol lottery result becomes “the special symbol 15R probability variable big hit” or “the special symbol 15R normal big hit”. It becomes difficult to grasp whether the state is “high probability state B of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol”.

  As a result, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol”, the player cannot grasp it, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol B”. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the winning probability is high. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the lottery of the special symbol The player can now have a strong expectation that the result will be a special symbol jackpot (special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot, special symbol 15R regular jackpot). Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 can enhance the interest of the game.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined by the player by providing “special symbol hits” and “special symbol small hits” as the special symbol lottery results. As a result, the following problem arises.

  First, the case where it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described more specifically. For example, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “a special symbol hit” Or suppose it is a “special design small hit”.

  As described above, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit”, the first symbol display device 37 is similar regardless of the special symbol lottery result. The first symbol is stopped and displayed. Moreover, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the same 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, and also a specific effect is performed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the 1st symbol, the stop display of the 3rd symbol, and the specific effect, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “ It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "small hit".

  Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is once “a special symbol hit” or When “special symbol small hit” is reached, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”. The lottery result is “special symbol small hit”, and the player cannot grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “exclusion of special symbol”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating that the lottery result indicates (out of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (excluding the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, while the jackpot effect, the specific effect, the special effect, or the like is not performed. For this reason, the player can recognize “disappearance of the special symbol” if attention is paid to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, and the presence / absence of the performance. And since the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the player can also grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. However, since the player has not been able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the “exclusion of the special symbol”, the player cannot continue to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol”. Is “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”. In this case, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the similar first symbol regardless of the special symbol lottery result. Moreover, in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the stop display of the same 3rd symbol is performed irrespective of the special symbol lottery result, and also the specific effect is similarly performed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the 1st symbol, the stop display of the 3rd symbol, and the specific effect, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol hit” or “ It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "small hit".

  Therefore, whether the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol win-win” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol high probability state B”, or the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol small The player cannot grasp whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has changed. In addition, the player cannot grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 before the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player cannot continue to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, the lottery result of the special symbol in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” or “low probability state of special symbol” Becomes “15R probability jackpot for special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot for special symbol”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating the lottery result (special symbol jackpot) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (special symbol jackpot) is stopped and displayed, and subsequently, the jackpot effect is performed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display car of the 1st symbol and the stop display of the 3rd symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “special symbol” Can be recognized. If attention is paid to the jackpot effect, it can be recognized that the special symbol has been won.

  When the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol”, after the 15th round jackpot (first special gaming state) is finished, the player has the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 “special symbol of It can be understood that the state becomes “high probability state A”. Further, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R normal jackpot”, the player, after the 15th round jackpot (first special gaming state), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” Can be understood.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set after the end of the 15 round jackpot (first special gaming state) even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been grasped so far. Therefore, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “a special symbol hit”. Or, even if it becomes “special symbol small hit” and the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol 15R probable big hit” or “special symbol bonus If the “15R normal jackpot” is reached, then the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, even if the player becomes able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 up to this point remains difficult to grasp.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine in which the special symbol lottery result and the “special symbol winning hit” and the “special symbol small hit” are provided, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit (first special game) State), and even if a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time, in any circumstances (for example, the game state at the time of the lottery, etc.) The jackpot of the special symbol ends without knowing whether the payout has been made. That is, despite the fact that the player has won the special symbol jackpot, the background to the acquisition remains unclear.

  Therefore, there is a risk that the player may be wondered about the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the lottery result of the special symbol has become a “special jackpot”. If the player is questioned, the player will continue to play the game without the question being resolved, and the player may continue to have discomfort thereafter. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  In particular, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit”. Or, after the player becomes unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the “special design small hit”, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time). If the symbol is a big hit, there is a high risk of discomfort for the player.

  In other words, after the player is unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time), the pachinko machine Including 10 cases where the player can no longer grasp the game state, among the special symbol lottery up to the third (for example, the third) lottery, the result of any special symbol lottery is "special symbol hit" There is a high risk that the player may have doubts that it was.

  In other words, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and the winning probability is high, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 for a few times (for example, When the special symbol lottery is performed for the third time, the player is likely to have doubts that the special symbol lottery result may have been a “special symbol jackpot”.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the game state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any special symbol out of the special symbol lottery up to the third (for example, the third) The player cannot know whether or not has become a “special symbol hit”. For this reason, the player continues the game without the question being resolved, and thereafter, the player is likely to continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  In addition, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 In the special symbol lottery about 100th, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “special symbol low probability state”, and the winning probability (for example, 1/300) is low, but when the special symbol drawing of the 100th time is made, fortunately, the player doubts that the lottery result of the special symbol has become a “special symbol jackpot” There is a risk of holding.

  However, with the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any special symbol out of the special symbol lottery up to about 100th time is “special symbol of The player cannot know whether or not the game has been “hit.” For this reason, the player continues the game without the question being resolved, and thereafter, the player is likely to continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. (90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", one of" Janken effects A to E "is executed in the variable display. And, it is configured to notify the player of how the special symbol of this time is a big hit depending on the type of the executed janken production. Although the reason will be described later, this makes it possible to arouse the player and enhance the fun of the game. When the variation pattern type is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “Janken effects A to E” are not performed, and normal variation display (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) is performed.

  As described above, “Janken productions A to E” are displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 with the character representing the player (self side) (the boy with a bee in this embodiment) and the opponent. The other party's character is displayed, and the junken game between each character is started, and finally the conclusion is given.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, if the “Janken production” is executed, the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken (or Finally, if you win the opponent ’s character), and the special symbol lottery result is “Excluded from Special Symbol”, if “Janken Production” is executed, the character representing the player (your side) will be lose. “Janken production A” is executed both when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” and when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”. However, “Janken effects B to E” are executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. Therefore, the player can recognize that the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot” when “Janken effects B to E” are executed.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol jackpot effect Depending on the pattern table 222c and the value of the continuity probability counter 223f, any one of “no janken effect, janken effects AD” is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1808 in FIG. 40).

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot” and variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern type of the variable display is “super reach (90 Second) ”or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, and if the value of the continuity count counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variable display is determined as“ Janken effect A ”, and the player ( The display mode is determined so that the character representing the player's side wins the janken. Similarly, if the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined as “Janken effect B”, and if the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variable effect is changed. If “Janken production C” is determined and the value of the counter value of continuous continuation counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the variation production is decided to be “Janken production D”, and the characters representing the respective players (self side) are The display mode is determined so as to win.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach” is performed. (120 seconds) ”and if all of the following three conditions are satisfied,“ Janken production E ”is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation production (see S1805 to S1807 in FIG. 40).

  The first condition is that the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol”, and the second condition is that the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is 100 or less. It is. The third condition is that the special effect flag 223e is on. Here, when all three conditions are satisfied, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of “low probability state of special symbol”, and once the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol small hit”, After that, until the variable display is executed 100 times, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become “surprise” and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot”.

  As described above, in the period from the last “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”, the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode of the variation effect (the type of the janken effect) is determined by the value of the sudden success number counter 223f.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the player pays attention to the type of “janken effect” executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol hit” from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special symbol jackpot”. Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot” after that, the player displays the variation effect. It can be understood in what gaming state the special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made according to the mode (that is, the type of janken production).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)”. If there is, “Janken effect A” is executed in the variation display. That is, when the special symbol lottery result is “excluded from special symbol” and the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the “junken effect A” is performed regardless of the value of the counterfeit consecutive number counter 223f. Is determined as the display mode of the fluctuating effect.

  Therefore, the player cannot recognize the number of times that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol win” from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current special symbol lottery. Therefore, the player cannot grasp the gaming state in which the special symbol lottery (disconnection of the special symbol) was made this time. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually “low probability state of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the special The player can have a strong sense of expectation that the symbol lottery result will be a “special symbol jackpot”.

  Next, by executing “Janken production” on the third symbol display device 81, examples of contents that can be grasped by the player, and reasons why the player can be delighted and can enhance the fun of the game. An example will be specifically described.

  In the case where the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production A”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Janken, This means that the lottery result of the special symbol has never been “special hit of special symbol” between this time and the “special symbol jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results between the previous “Special design jackpot” and the current “Special symbol jackpot” are either “Special design miss” or “Special design jackpot”. In any case, this means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult for the player to grasp, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs variable display, the display mode is “Janken effect A”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the most recent gaming state in which it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player understands that each specific performance performed during the difficult period including the case where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is due to “special design small hits”. it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for about the 100th time. Then, although the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains “the low probability state of the special symbol”, and the winning probability is low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when the special symbol lottery is made for the 100th time, fortunately, there is a possibility that the lottery result of this special symbol may have become a “special symbol jackpot”. is there.

  In addition, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30). ) However, if it is not easy to win and this special symbol drawing is done, there may be a doubt that the special symbol lottery result will be a “special symbol jackpot” .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production A”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, Fortunately, although the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lottery result of this special symbol is “special symbol jackpot” Can be understood. Thus, if the predictions are correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her thoughts were correct. Further, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has been lucky in the situation where the winning probability is low.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode is “Janken production B” and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol winning” once during the period from the “big bonus” to the “special symbol jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, a variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken effect B”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol sudden hit” once between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, including the case where the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of any special symbol among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third) is “special symbol” There is a high risk of doubting that it may have been a “good hit”. That is, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30). Therefore, there is a high risk of doubt that the result of this special symbol lottery may have been a “special jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production B”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the janken, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that a “special symbol jackpot” has been made immediately after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol big hit” twice from the “big jackpot” to the “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, the 3rd symbol display device 81 performs variable display, and the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol hit” twice between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special jackpot”. . In addition, the player is responsible for “special symbol hits” twice in each of the specific effects performed within the difficult period of time, including when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult to grasp. It can be grasped that the others were due to "special bonuses".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high (for example, Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol may have become “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production C”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that a “special symbol jackpot” has been made immediately after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  In addition, the player may receive a special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special hit of special symbol” twice.

  As described above, “special symbol wins” is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but if it is determined to be “special jackpot”, the probability of “special symbol hits” is , “1/6”. On the other hand, the probability of “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” is “1/3”, and the probability of “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” is “1/2”. Thus, when the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, it is determined that the “special symbol 15R probability jackpot” or “the special symbol 15R normal jackpot” is determined rather than the “special symbol jackpot”. Is more likely to be determined.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become a “special symbol jackpot”, including a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can no longer be grasped, It is a little disappointing that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special hit of the special symbol” twice. As described above, by executing the “junken effect” in the third symbol display device 81, the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the character representing the player (one side) wins the Jeanken, This means that the lottery result of the special symbol has reached the “special symbol big hit” three times or more from the “big jackpot” to the current “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results from the previous “special symbol jackpot” to the current “special jackpot” will be “special symbol hit” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “special symbol”. Means a high probability state B ”.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult for the player to grasp, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display, and the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins the janken, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in the “high probability state B of special symbol”. In addition, the player understands that the lottery result of the special symbol has been more than three times in the “special symbol big hit” between the previous “special symbol jackpot” and the current “special symbol jackpot”. it can. Also, at least three times of the specific effects executed within the difficult period of time, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player is based on “a special symbol hit” It can be understood that the others were due to "small bonuses for special symbols".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for several times (for example, the fourth).

  Then, as described above, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production D”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, As expected, the player includes a case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, and among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the fourth), the special symbol lottery result is “special”. It can be understood that it was a "striking hit of the design". Therefore, the player can have a feeling of satisfaction that his / her idea was hit. In addition, the player can have the satisfaction that the game game has become a “special jackpot” as soon as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped.

  In addition, the player may receive a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth), including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, but the game state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol was “special symbol hit” at least three times.

  As described above, “special symbol wins” is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but if it is determined to be “special jackpot”, the probability of “special symbol hits” is , “1/6”. That is, there is a higher probability of being determined as “a special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “a special symbol 15R normal jackpot” than being determined as “special symbol jackpot”.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become a “special symbol jackpot”, including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can no longer be grasped, among the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the fourth), I am very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol has been "special hits" more than once. As described above, by executing the “junken effect” in the third symbol display device 81, the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (your side) wins the opponent's character, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become the “special hit of the special symbol” between the special symbol jackpot and the current “special jackpot”. In other words, the special symbol lottery results between the previous “Special design jackpot” and the current “Special symbol jackpot” are either “Special design miss” or “Special design jackpot”. In any case, this means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. Further, it means that the lottery of special symbols has not exceeded 100 times since the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult for the player to grasp, a variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the player (self When the character representing the side) wins over the opponent's character, the player can grasp that the current special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made in a “special symbol low probability state”. In addition, the player, once the special symbol lottery result is "special symbol small hit", and then the special symbol lottery result does not become "surprise hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. In addition, the player understands that each specific performance performed during the difficult period including the case where it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is due to “special design small hits”. it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” in the special symbol lottery for about the 100th time.

  Then, as described above, although the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the winning probability is not changed. If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then the special symbol lottery is made about the 100th time, fortunately, the special symbol lottery result may have become a “special symbol jackpot”. There is a risk of doubt.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can no longer grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes “special symbol high probability state B”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, it was 1/30), but it was hard to win, and when the special symbol drawing was made this time, I was wondering if the special symbol lottery finally became a “special symbol jackpot” There is a risk of holding.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the opponent character. The player is lucky, although the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol of You can see that it was a big hit. Thus, if the predictions are correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her thoughts were correct.

  Also, the player can grasp that the special symbol jackpot has been reached by the time the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he has won in a situation where the winning probability is low and a satisfaction that he has been lucky.

  Further, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “a low probability state of a special symbol” and the player grasps the gaming state, the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Then, in the special symbol lottery for the third time (for example, the third time), it is assumed that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”.

  Then, as described above, after the player cannot grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the winning probability is high ( For example, when the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be “special symbol jackpot”.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display mode is “Janken production E”, and the character representing the player (self side) wins the janken, The player is greatly different from the expectation, and although the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), fortunately the lottery result of the special symbol is “ You can see that it was a special symbol jackpot.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the special symbol lottery up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped. Under circumstances, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very fortunate to be elected in a very rare situation, and very fortunate, although his thoughts were greatly different.

  As described above, in a conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation described above occurs, the player cannot grasp the situation. Therefore, for example, since the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol” and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), the player has a lottery result of the special symbol “ I thought it would have been a “special design jackpot” and sometimes it ended.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. (90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", one of" Janken effects A to E "is executed in the variable display. And it is comprised so that it may alert | report to a player how the big symbol of this special symbol was made | formed according to the kind of the executed janken production.

  Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol smash hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol If the lottery result is a special symbol jackpot, the player can determine what game state this special symbol lottery (special symbol jackpot) was made according to the type of “Janken production”. I can grasp. Therefore, even if the player has a question about what circumstances (for example, the gaming status at the time of the lottery, etc.), the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot” The question can be solved. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player continues discomfort, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. As a result, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “low probability state of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the special symbol lottery result is temporarily set. Becomes “a special symbol hit” or “a special symbol small hit”, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once becomes “ ”Or“ special symbol small hit ”, it is not difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the lottery result of the special symbol is “successful hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high of special symbol” From “probability state A” to “high probability state B of special symbol”. On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “small hit”, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in the “high probability state A of special symbol”.

  Therefore, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of special symbol” and the player knows the gaming state, once the lottery result of the special symbol “successful hit of special symbol” ”Or“ special symbol small hit ”, and even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player is able to change the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to the“ high probability state A or B ”. Therefore, in this case, the player is less likely to be questioned as to what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured as follows. And, according to the type of janken production that has been executed, the player is informed of how the special symbol of this time was a big hit, but during the jackpot production, "Janken production AE" is executed May be. Further, the effect to be executed may not be “Janken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of “Janken effects A to E” is associated with the value of the continuity counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  The above is the description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to display “Janken Productions A to A” in the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”. "E" is executed, and the player is notified of how the special symbol of this time has been won, depending on the type of janken performance performed. However, the notification method is not limited to “Janken productions A to E”, and another notification is made so that the player is informed of how the special symbol of this time was a big hit. Also good.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot”, the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. If the variation pattern type is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variation display. In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol small hit” and the number of lottery times of the special symbol made during the period in which it is difficult to grasp are notified.

  As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the only difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment is the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores programs for executing a variable display setting process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) in the second embodiment, which will be described later, and a special effect setting process (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment. .

  FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In addition to the areas 223a and 223j, the counters 223b, 223f, 223h, 223i, 223k, and 223l, and the flags 223c to 223e, 223g, and 223m, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a counter number of continuous hits counter. 223n, an unrecognizable period flag 223o, and an unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p.

  The small hit consecutive number counter 223n counts the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "special symbol small hit" during the period from the previous "special symbol big hit" to the current "special symbol big hit". It is a counter for. The small hit continuous number counter 223n is cleared by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). When the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the stop type of the variation effect is “small hit”, 1 is added to the small hit consecutive number counter 223f (S4001 in FIG. 57). reference). In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and when the jackpot effect ends, the small hit consecutive number counter 223n is cleared (FIG. 60). (See S4103). That is, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol small hit” during the period from the previous “special symbol big hit” to the current “special symbol big hit” by the small hit consecutive number counter 223n. Counted.

  The value of the small hit consecutive number counter 223n indicates that the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol big hit” is “super reach (90 Second) ”or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, the change display displays the notification (see FIG. 58). When the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n is notified, the value of the sudden success number counter 223f described in the first embodiment is also notified.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit effect ends, the small hit consecutive number counter 223n is cleared. However, it may be cleared at any time within the period of the big hit effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  The unrecognizable period flag 223o is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the player to grasp. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and when the unrecognizable period flag 223o is off, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is played. It is a period that the person can grasp.

  The unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to OFF by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). When the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the specific effect ends, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to ON (FIG. 60). S4101).

  Further, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the jackpot effect ends, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to OFF (FIG. 60). S4102). This unrecognizable period flag 223o will be described later in order to count the number of fluctuation effects during a period in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. Used together with the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to off. However, it may be set to off anytime within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set off at the start of the jackpot presentation.

  The non-recognizable period fluctuation counter 223p is a variable effect for a period during which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the period from the previous “special jackpot” to the current “special jackpot”. It is a counter for counting the number of times. The unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p is cleared by the initial setting process of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). When the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the above-described unrecognizable period flag 223o is on, 1 is added to the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p (see S4004 in FIG. 58). ). Further, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the jackpot effect ends, the unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p is cleared (FIG. 60). S4103).

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is cleared. However, it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, the jackpot effect may be cleared at the start.

  That is, by the unrecognizable period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the fluctuation of the period during which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the period from the previous “special jackpot” to the current “special jackpot”. The number of productions is counted.

  The value of the unrecognizable period variation number counter 223p is notified in the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol big win” (see FIG. 59). .

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special”. If “reach (120 seconds)”, the value of the non-recognizable period variation count counter 223p, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and the value of the small hit count count 223n are displayed in the variation display (FIG. 59). reference). As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. In addition, about the step which performs the process same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the variable display setting process (S1412) in the second embodiment.

  The variable display setting process in the second embodiment is executed instead of the above-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. As in the case of the first embodiment, the variation display setting process in the second embodiment is also varied such as the display mode of the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode of the stop display at the end of the variation. This is a process for setting the production.

  In the variable display setting process, when the process of S1812 ends, the process proceeds to S4002. In the process of S1813, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “small hit” (S1813: Yes), the process proceeds to S4001. In the process of S4001, 1 is added to the small hit consecutive number counter 223n (S4001). Then, the process proceeds to S4002. In the process of S4002, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to ON (S4002). Then, the process proceeds to S1815.

  In the process of S1818, if the after-hit flag 223g is on (S1818: Yes), 1 is added to the after-hit fluctuation number counter 223h (S1819), and the process proceeds to S4003. On the other hand, if the after-hit flag 223g is OFF in the process of S1818 (S1818: No), the process of S1819 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4003.

  In the process of S4003, it is determined whether the unrecognizable period flag 223o is on (S4003). If the unrecognizable period flag 223o is on in the process of S4003 (S4003: Yes), 1 is added to the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, if the unrecognizable period flag 223o is off in the process of S4003 (S4003: No), the process of S4004 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4005.

  In this embodiment, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is provided, but it is not always necessary to provide it. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to ON, either the process of S1812 or the process of S4001 is executed. Therefore, in the process of S4003, it may be determined whether one of the value of the sudden success count counter 223f and the value of the small hit success count counter 223n is 1 or more. Then, if one of the value of the sudden success count counter 223f and the value of the small hit success count counter 223n is 1 or more, the process proceeds to S4004, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and If the values of the small hit consecutive number counter 223n are both 0, the process may proceed to S4005.

  In the process of S4005, it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability variation big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (S4005). In the process of S4005, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability variable big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (S4005: Yes), the value of the unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p and the number of sudden consecutive times The value of the counter 223f and the value of the small hit consecutive number counter 223n are respectively acquired (S4006). Then, the display mode of the variation effect is set so that the acquired values are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the janken effect (S4007). Then, the process proceeds to S1820.

  Here, when the processing of S4006 and S4007 is executed, when a variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The value, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and the value of the small hit count count 223n are displayed. As a result, the details such as the contents of the special symbol lottery result made within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are notified.

  As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not “15R probability variation big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (S4005: No), the processes of S4006 and S4007 described above are skipped, and S1820 is performed. Move on to processing.

  According to the variable display setting process shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 described above, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 Is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, the value of the unrecognizable period variation number counter 223p, the value of the sudden success number counter 223f, and the number of consecutive small hits in the variation display The display mode of the variation effect can be set so that the value of the counter 223n is displayed.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “normal reach (20 seconds)”. For example, the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and the value of the small hit count counter 223n are not displayed in the variation display. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, it may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59, an example of a display screen when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and a variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds). ) ”Or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, the value of the unrecognizable period variation count counter 223p, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and the value of the small hit count count 223n are displayed in the variation display. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, among the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds that constitute the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the value of the unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p and the suddenness are determined in the sub display area Ds. The value of the continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n are displayed. It is not limited to the sub display area Ds, but may be displayed anywhere within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, “from special effect entry to big hit” is displayed, and further, the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is displayed following the display of “total variation count →”. Is done. For example, “20 times” is displayed. In addition, the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f is displayed following the display of “the number of continuity hits →”. For example, “1 time” is displayed. Further, following the display of “number of small hits →”, the value of the continuous small hit number counter 223n is displayed. For example, “5 times” is displayed.

  By viewing this display screen, the player can see the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol hit” within the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to recognize the number of times the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol small hit” and the number of times the special symbol lottery has been performed. Therefore, the player can grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In particular, since the number of times is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot” in any circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.). It is easy for a player to grasp intuitively.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the background of the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. There is a risk that the player may have the question of whether or not

  Even if the player is questioned as to how the special symbol lottery result has become a “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 has a player as described above. Can grasp the details of what kind of contents the special symbol lottery result made during the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 was difficult to grasp. Therefore, the player's question can be solved. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player holds discomfort continuously, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Next, the special effect setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing (S1413) in the second embodiment.

  The special effect setting process in the second embodiment is executed instead of the special effect setting process (see FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. As in the case of the first embodiment, the special effect setting process in the second embodiment is also executed for the special effect such as executing the special effect in the third symbol display device 81 or ending the special effect being executed. This is a process for setting.

  In the special effect setting process, when the process of S1917 ends, the process proceeds to S4101. In the processing of S4101, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to off (S4101). Next, the small hit consecutive number counter 223n and the unrecognizable period variation number counter 223p are cleared (S4102), and the process proceeds to S1919.

  The above is the description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type is “ If it is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variation display.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol became “special symbol hit” within the period when the player had difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol small hit”, and the number of times of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the details such as what the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is difficult to grasp.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the background of the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. There is a risk that the player may have the question of whether or not

  Even if the player is questioned as to how the special symbol lottery result has become a “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 has a player as described above. Can grasp the details of what kind of contents the special symbol lottery result made during the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 was difficult to grasp. Therefore, the player's question can be solved. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player holds discomfort continuously, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” within the period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the special The number of times that the lottery result of the symbol is “special symbol small hit” and the number of lottery times of the special symbol made during the period in which it was difficult to grasp are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively understand the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become the “special symbol jackpot”.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, only different parts from the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach ( 90 seconds) ”or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, the special symbol lottery result will be“ special symbol hit ”within the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. And the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol small hit” and the number of lottery times of the special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super”. If it is “reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, the lottery results for the predetermined number of times from the latest among the past special symbol lottery results are notified. As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”.

  First, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. Of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the only difference between the second embodiment and the third embodiment is the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores a program for executing a variable display setting process (see FIGS. 63 and 64) in a third embodiment to be described later.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In addition to the above-described areas 223a and 223j, counters 223b, 223f, 223h, 223i, 223k, 223l, 223n, and 223p, flags 223c to 223e, 223g, 223m, and 223o are stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp controller 113. And at least a lottery result history storage area 223q.

  The lottery result history storage area 223q is an area for storing lottery results for a predetermined number of times from the latest among the lottery results of past special symbols. Here, the details of the lottery result history storage area 223q will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the lottery result history storage area 223q. The lottery result history storage area 223q has 20 areas from the first area to the twentieth area. Each of these areas is provided with at least a stop type storage area 223p1 and a variation pattern type storage area 223q2. The stop type storage area 223p1 is an area for storing a stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, and the variation pattern type storage area 223q2 is a variable pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. This is the storage area.

  Each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is initialized by initial setting processing of the RAM 223 after power-on (see S1310 in FIG. 35). Specifically, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is cleared to zero. As described above, when receiving the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command, and the extracted stop type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. Store. When the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern type is extracted, and the extracted variation pattern type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a.

  After that, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, the variation pattern type, when setting the display mode of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81. Is stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q.

  When the stop type and the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a are stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q, first, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q (the first number) Shift processing is performed to pack the data stored in the first area to the nineteenth area into the area having the larger area number (the second area to the twentieth area). When this shift process is performed, the shift process is performed in order from the area with the largest area number. Specifically, first, the variable n is set to 19, and the data in the nth area is shifted to the (n + 1) th area. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of n, and this shift process and subtraction of the value of n are repeated until the value of the variable n becomes 0.

  In the lottery result history storage area 223q, among the data indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the data having the larger area number stores the older data in time, and the 20th area stores the oldest data in time. Will be. In the present embodiment, the first area to the twentieth area are provided, but the number of areas to be provided may be arbitrarily determined.

  The data stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is used for notifying the past special symbol lottery results when the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot” (FIG. 64). (See S4201 and S4202).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. In addition, about the step which performs the process same as 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the variable display setting process (S1412) in the third embodiment.

  The variable display setting process in the third embodiment is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) of the second embodiment described above. As in the case of the second embodiment, the variation display setting process in the third embodiment is also varied such as the display mode of the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 and the display mode of the stop display at the end of the variation. This is a process for setting the production.

  In the variable display setting process, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability change big hit” or “15R normal big hit” in the process of S4005 (S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to S4201. In the process of S4201, the history corresponding to the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is acquired from the latest one among the lottery results (that is, the stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q ( S4201). For example, when the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is 1, the stop type stored in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired. When the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is 5, the stop type stored in each area from the first area to the fifth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired.

  Then, the display mode of the variation effect is set so that the lottery result history acquired in the process of S4201 is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the janken effect (S4202). Then, the process proceeds to S1820.

  Here, when the processing of S4201 and S4202 is executed, when a variation effect is executed in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the past special symbols is displayed in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81. Is displayed. The past special symbol lottery results are displayed for the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p from the most recent one.

  As described above, the unrecognizable period variation number counter 223p counts the number of variation effects during the period in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 among the variation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a counter for doing. Therefore, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result (that is, the history) is displayed for the lottery of the special symbol made within a period in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Is done. As a result, the details such as the contents of the special symbol lottery result made within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are notified.

  As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, when the stop type acquired in the processing of S1803 is not “15R probability variation big hit” or “15R normal big hit” (S4005: No), the processing of S4201 and S4202 described above is skipped, and S1820 is performed. Move on to processing.

  In addition, when the process of S1825 ends, the process proceeds to S4203. Further, in the process of S1824, when the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l is 0 (S1824: No), the process proceeds to S4203.

  In the process of S4203, the data of each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is shifted (S4203). The data shift process performed in the process of S4203 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the nineteenth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q toward the area with the larger area number. Specifically, the data in each area, such as 19th area → 20th area, 18th area → 19th area, 17th area → 18th area,..., 1st area → 2nd area, etc. shift.

  The stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is stored in the stop type storage area 223p1 in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q and stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. The variation pattern type is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 223q2 in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q (S4204). Then, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  According to the variation display setting process shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 above, the variation pattern type of variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”. Is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, the lottery result (that is, stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the variable display is the third symbol. The display mode of the change effect can be set so as to be displayed while the change display is performed on the display device 81.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “normal reach (20 seconds)”. For example, in the change display, the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is not displayed. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, it may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, an example of a display screen when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and a variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds). ) ”Or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the variable display is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the sub display area Ds out of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The result (that is, the stop type) is displayed. It is not limited to the sub display area Ds, but may be displayed anywhere within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, first, “Lottery history from special effect entry to jackpot” is displayed. Here, when the value of the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is represented by n, the lottery result (stop) stored in the nth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q under the display of “When rushing”. Type) is displayed. For example, “small hit” is displayed. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol when the player is able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the state where the player can grasp the gaming state is displayed.

  Further, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the (n−1) th area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed under the display of “first time”. For example, “Out” is displayed. In this embodiment, when the stop type is “completely disengaged”, “front / rear disengagement reach”, or “reach other than disengagement before / after disengagement”, all indicate “disengagement”. Also, here, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult for the player to grasp, the first special symbol lottery result is displayed.

  Further, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the (n-2) th area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed under the display of “second time”. For example, “Collision hit” is displayed. Here, after the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes difficult for the player to grasp, the second special symbol lottery result is displayed. Thereafter, similarly, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q until the value of n (here, the value of the unrecognizable period variation count counter 223p) becomes 1, that is, Until the symbol is displayed, past lottery results of special symbols are displayed.

  The player visually recognizes this display screen, and what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 I can understand the background.

  In particular, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results are displayed in chronological order for the special symbol lottery made within a period in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 ( That is, the lottery result history is displayed). Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively understand the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become the “special symbol jackpot”.

  Specifically, after “special design small hit” and “special design miss” continued, it became “special design big hit”, and then “special design big hit” Despite the fact that it has become a “successful symbol”, the player intuitively knows whether the “special symbol bonus” or “special symbol miss” has continued for a while and then the “special symbol bonus” I can grasp.

  For example, if “special design small hits” or “special design miss” continues, then “special design hits” and then immediately after “special design big hits”, the player It wasn't quite a “special symbol jackpot”, but at last, the situation changed completely (a big reversal), and it was possible to grasp that it was a “special symbol jackpot” all at once. Therefore, by making the player recognize that it has become a “special symbol jackpot” dramatically, the player can be raised, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. In addition, the player can feel satisfied that he was lucky.

  Also, for example, if “special design jackpot” or “special design miss” continues for a while and “special symbol jackpot” occurs, even though “special symbol accuracy” becomes a player, Is happy to become a “special design jackpot”, but despite the fact that the winning probability was high (eg, 1/30) for a long time, it was difficult to become a “special design jackpot”. I am disappointed. As described above, the lottery results of the special symbols made during the period in which the player is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in chronological order ( In other words, by displaying the lottery result history), the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” or “special bonus”, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, if the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the background of the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. There is a risk that the player may have the question of whether or not

  Even if the player is questioned as to how the special symbol lottery result has become a “special symbol jackpot”, the pachinko machine 10 has a player as described above. Can grasp the details of what kind of contents the special symbol lottery result made during the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 was difficult to grasp. Therefore, the player's question can be solved. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player holds discomfort continuously, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery results of special symbols made within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed in chronological order (that is, lottery results) History) is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively understand the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become the “special symbol jackpot”.

  In particular, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results are displayed in chronological order for the special symbol lottery made within a period in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 ( That is, the lottery result history is displayed). Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively understand the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become the “special symbol jackpot”.

  Specifically, after “special design small hit” and “special design miss” continued, it became “special design big hit”, and then “special design big hit” Despite the fact that it has become a “successful symbol”, the player intuitively knows whether the “special symbol bonus” or “special symbol miss” has continued for a while and then the “special symbol bonus” I can grasp.

  For example, if “special design small hits” or “special design miss” continues, then “special design hits” and then immediately after “special design big hits”, the player It wasn't quite a “special symbol jackpot”, but at last, the situation changed completely (a big reversal), and it was possible to grasp that it was a “special symbol jackpot” all at once. Therefore, the player can be raised by dramatically becoming a “special symbol jackpot”, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. In addition, the player can feel satisfied that he was lucky.

  Also, for example, if “special design jackpot” or “special design miss” continues for a while and “special symbol jackpot” occurs, even though “special symbol accuracy” becomes a player, Is happy to become a “special design jackpot”, but despite the fact that the winning probability was high (eg, 1/30) for a long time, it was difficult to become a “special design jackpot”. I am disappointed. As described above, the lottery results of the special symbols made during the period in which the player is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in chronological order ( In other words, by displaying the lottery result history), the player can be relieved and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, each lottery result (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although it is displayed, out of each lot from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q as a lottery result (stop type is “completely out”, “front / rear out of reach”, “other than out of front / back) For the area in which “reach” is stored, the lottery result (stop type) may not be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the winning hit and the small hit may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first place, each lottery result history storage area 223q is configured not to store a lottery result (stop type is “completely missed”, “front / rear missed reach”, “reach other than missed before / after miss”) as a lottery result. In addition, you may comprise so that it may not be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about disengagement. In other words, the winning hit and the small hit may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The “high probability state of a special symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first gaming state” described in the claims, and the “low probability state of a special symbol” described in the above embodiment is This corresponds to the “second gaming state” recited in the claims. In addition, “15R probability big hit of special symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “first lottery result” described in the claims, and “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” described in the above embodiment. This corresponds to the “second lottery result” described in the claims. In addition, the “special symbol winning hit” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “third lottery result” described in the claims, and the “special symbol small hit” described in the above embodiment is claimed. Corresponds to the “fourth lottery result” described in the above embodiment, and “exclusion of the special symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “fifth lottery result” described in the claims. In addition, “Janken productions A to D” described in the above embodiment are selected according to “a lottery result of a lottery by a lottery unit” according to claims, and according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit Corresponding to “a mode to be switched”, “Janken production E” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “another mode” described in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach”. (90 seconds) ”or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, the lottery result of the special symbol is“ special symbol ”within the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display. The number of times that the “successful hit” was reached, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol was “small bonus of the special symbol”, and the number of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp It is configured. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment has a variation pattern type of variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. (90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", the lottery results for the predetermined number of times from the latest among the lottery results of the past special symbols are displayed in the variable display. On the other hand, the stop display screens made on the third symbol display device 81 within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the work RAM 223 of the display control device 114 in chronological order. When the special symbol lottery results in “special symbol jackpot”, the stored image is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, in the sub display area Ds). They may be displayed side by side in the order of series. Note that one image or a plurality of images may be displayed in chronological order. The player visually recognizes this display screen, and what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 I can understand the background. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol wins” or “special symbol small hit”, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol” Even if the player has the question of how the special symbol lottery results in the “special symbol jackpot”, the player will still have that question. Can be eliminated. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player continues discomfort, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has a variation pattern type of variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”. (90 seconds) ”or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, the lottery result of the special symbol is“ special symbol ”within the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display. The number of times that the “successful hit” was reached, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol was “small bonus of the special symbol”, and the number of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp It is configured. On the other hand, the number of times that the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit” by the combination of the third symbol in the stop display on the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol”. May be notified of the number of times that the “small bonus” has been reached and the number of special symbol lotteries made during a period in which it was difficult to grasp. For example, on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1, the third symbol to which the same number as the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “a special symbol hit” is displayed. Then, on the effective line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, the third symbol to which the same number as the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “special symbol small hit” is displayed. Then, on the effective line L1 of the right symbol row Z3, the number of special symbol lotteries made within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The player visually recognizes this display screen, and what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 I can understand the background. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol wins” or “special symbol small hit”, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol” If the player gets a question about how the special symbol lottery result has become a “special jackpot”, the player will Can eliminate doubts. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player continues discomfort, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)” or If it is “Special Reach (120 seconds)”, any one of “Janken Effects A to E” is executed in the variable display. Then, the player is informed of how the special symbol of this time was a big hit, depending on the type of janken production performed. However, “Janken productions A to E” may be executed during the jackpot production. Further, the effect to be executed may not be “Janken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of “Janken effects A to E” is associated with the value of the continuity counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  In the above embodiment, the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect once ended is restarted at the timing when the change effect ends. However, the change effect is being executed within the period during which the change effect is being executed. The special effect may be ended, or the special effect once ended may be resumed. In other words, if the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect once ended is restarted at the execution unit of the variable effect, it may be ended at any time or restarted at any time.

  In the second and third embodiments, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is provided, but is not necessarily provided. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to ON, either the process of S1812 or the process of S4001 is executed (see FIGS. 57 and 63). Therefore, in the process of S4003, it may be determined whether one of the value of the sudden success count counter 223f and the value of the small hit success count counter 223n is 1 or more. Then, if one of the value of the sudden success count counter 223f and the value of the small hit success count counter 223n is 1 or more, the process proceeds to S4004, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and If the values of the small hit consecutive number counter 223n are both 0, the process may proceed to S4005.

  Further, in the above embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol” and the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach”, the number of sudden consecutive times Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, “Janken effect A” is selected as the display mode of the variable display. Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot” and the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach” or “special reach”, the variation display As a display mode, “Janken effects A” may not be selected, and any of “Janken effects B to E” may be selected. Thereby, when the display mode of the variable display is “Janken effects B to E”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”. Therefore, each time the variable display is performed, the player can be attracted to the variable display, and the player can be relieved by the display mode of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol” and the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach”, the number of sudden consecutive times Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, “Janken effect A” is selected as the display mode of the variable display. On the other hand, not only “Janken production A” but also other “Janken productions B to E” may be selected. However, since the effect is performed when the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol”, the character representing the player (your side) must be defeated by the opponent's character. When “Janken productions A to E” are selected, for example, “No janken production” and “Janken productions A to E” are based on the value of the continuity count counter 223f or the value of the counter change counter 223h after small hits. Select one from "E". Further, for example, referring to the value of the counter-attack continuous number counter 223f or the value of the counter change number counter 223h after hitting, one of “Janken effects A to E” may be selected (that is, the Janken effect always. May be selected). In addition, a random number counter for selecting an effect at the time of departure may be provided, and one of “no janken effect” and “janken effects AE” may be selected according to the random number counter, Depending on the random number counter, one of “Janken effects A to E” may be selected.

  Further, in the above embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol” and the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach”, the number of sudden consecutive times Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, “Janken effect A” is selected as the display mode of the variable display. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, if the variation pattern type of the fluctuation display is “super reach”, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”. Similarly to the case, “Janken effects A to D” may be selected according to the value of the continuous continuity counter 223f. Moreover, you may comprise so that "Janken production E" may be selected. However, since the effect is performed when the special symbol lottery result is “out of special symbol”, the character representing the player (your side) must be defeated by the opponent's character. Thereby, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “out of special symbol”, the display mode of the variable display is determined according to the value of the continuity count counter 223f. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol wins” or “special symbol small hit”, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol” If the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state B of special symbol”, and the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol hit” Can be suggested to the player.

  In the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)” or In the case of “special reach (120 seconds)”, one of “Janken effects A to E” is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, depending on whether the variation pattern type of the variation display is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, the contents of the effects performed in “Janken effects A to E” are determined. It may be changed. For example, when the variation pattern type of the variation display is “super reach (90 seconds)”, a character representing a player (self side) and an accessory character appear as an opponent character, and a janken confrontation is performed. You may comprise so that direction may be performed. If the variation pattern type of the variation display is “special reach”, a character representing the player (your side) and a big character (boss) character as the opponent's character appear, and an effect to perform a junken confrontation You may comprise so that it may perform.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot” is not included, and the period after that until the special symbol lottery result becomes “special jackpot” In order to determine whether or not the number of fluctuation display (special symbol lottery) executed in (1) is less than or equal to 100, a after-hit fluctuation number counter 223h is provided. Specifically, when the initial value of the variation counter 223h after the small hit is set to 0, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special bonus for small symbol”, if the variation effect is executed thereafter, 1 is set. Adding. Also, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot” and the jackpot effect is executed, it is cleared to zero. If the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is 100 or more, the lottery result of the special symbol does not include the case where the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol small hit”. It is determined that the number of variable displays (special symbol lottery) executed within the period until “special symbol jackpot” is 100 or less (S1806 in FIG. 40, S1921 in FIG. 41, etc.). On the other hand, if the initial value of the variation counter 223h after the small hit is set to 100, and the lottery result of the special symbol is “special small hit”, then 1 is subtracted if variation display is executed thereafter. You may do it. In this case, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol jackpot” and the jackpot effect is executed, the jackpot effect is set to 100. Then, if the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is 0 or less, the lottery result of the special symbol does not include the case where the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol small hit”. It may be determined that the number of fluctuating effects (special symbol lottery) executed within the period until the special symbol jackpot is 100 or less.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol hit per hit” or “special symbol hit per hit”, the third symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the third symbol. Thus, after a predetermined time has elapsed, a similar third symbol (that is, “exclusion of special symbol” in which reach occurs) is stopped and displayed. However, the stop display of the third symbol need not be limited to this. For example, it is a combination of the third symbols that cannot be reached, and the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have the same main symbols (10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers “0” to “9”). ) May be displayed so as to be included one by one. In addition, it is a combination of third symbols that are reachable but not hit, and correspond to a specific main symbol ("4" or "7" number) as the third symbol displayed in the center of the middle symbol row Z2. May be displayed in a stopped manner.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, the display mode of the variable display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is determined to any one of "no janken production" and "janken production AE" is doing. In addition, execution of special effects, termination of special effects, and resumption of special effects are determined. However, the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the display mode of the variable display, the execution of the special effect, the end of the special effect, and the restart of the special effect, or the display control device 114. You may comprise so that it may be performed in. In that case, a program for executing the variable display setting process shown in FIG. 40 and the special effect setting process shown in FIG. 41, a special effect end determination table 222a, a special effect restart determination table 222b, and an effect pattern The table 222c is stored in the ROM of the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Also, a special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, a gaming state flag 223c, a special effect in-progress flag 223e, a continuous continuity counter 223f, a small hit after flag 223g, a small hit after change count counter 223h, and a special effect lottery Each memory such as the counter 223i is provided in the RAM of the main controller 110 or the display controller 114.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “normal reach (20 Second ”), the value of the non-recognizable period variation number counter 223p, the value of the sudden success number counter 223f, and the value of the small hit number of times counter 223n are not displayed. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special jackpot”, it may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of unrecognizable period fluctuations in the sub display area Ds out of the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The value of the counter 223p, the value of the sudden success count counter 223f, and the value of the small hit success count counter 223n are displayed, but not only in the sub display area Ds but in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 If so, it may be displayed anywhere.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery result history storage area 223q is provided from the first area to the twentieth area, but the number of areas to be provided may be arbitrarily determined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “normal reach (20 Second ”), the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is not displayed in the variable display. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, it may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery result history storage area is included in the sub display area Ds among the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds that constitute the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in 223q is displayed. However, the lottery result may be displayed anywhere within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 without being limited to the sub display area Ds. .

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery result (that is, the stop type) is stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q. However, instead of the lottery result, a special symbol lottery is performed. The game state set in the pachinko machine 10 may be stored in the case of being played. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special jackpot”, the game state history stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q may be notified. Thereby, the player can grasp the circumstances such as in what gaming state the special symbol lottery made within the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is difficult to grasp. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol wins” or “special symbol small hit”, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol” Even if the player has the question of how the special symbol lottery results in the “special symbol jackpot”, the player will still have that question. Can be eliminated. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player continues discomfort, it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls. Therefore, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach ( 90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", the value of the sudden success counter 223f and the value of the small hits continuous counter 223n are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the variable display. Is displayed. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to produce an effect indicating the value of the sudden success count counter 223f and the value of the small hit count count 223n. For example, when the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the number indicated by the continuation probability counter 223f is represented by the number of characters (side characters) belonging to the player (self side) The number indicated by the small hit consecutive number counter 223n may be represented by the number of characters belonging to (enemy character). That is, the same number of characters on the ally side appear (displayed) as the number indicated by the sudden success count counter 223f, and the same number of enemy characters as the number indicated by the small hit count counter 223n appear (displayed). The production is configured as follows. As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”. In addition, it is easy for the player to intuitively understand the circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery, etc.) and the special symbol lottery result has become a “special symbol jackpot”. In addition, the display is similarly performed not only when the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, but also in other cases. You may comprise so that it may perform.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach ( 90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", each lottery result (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is It is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the production which shows the lottery result stored in each area may be performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. For example, when the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results (stop types) stored in the respective areas from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q are old. Are extracted one by one in order, and the effect is executed in units of the extracted lottery results. More specifically, if a character indicating the player (your side) and the opponent's character are made to appear and the extracted lottery result is “Successful hit”, the player's character is the opponent's character. On the other hand, if the extracted lottery result is “small hit”, the player character is punched by the opponent character. In addition, if the extracted lottery result is “out”, the character on the own side and the character on the other side perform an effect of checking each other.
As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “special symbol winning hit” or “special symbol small hit” and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol is subsequently When the result of the lottery becomes “special symbol jackpot”, the player can understand how the special symbol lottery result becomes “special symbol jackpot”. In addition, since the lottery results are displayed in chronological order, the player is intuitively aware of the circumstances (for example, the gaming status at the time of the lottery, etc.) Easy to grasp. In addition, the display is similarly performed not only when the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, but also in other cases. You may comprise so that it may perform. In addition, when the extracted lottery result is “out”, the effect may be skipped. That is, it may be configured such that an effect is performed when the lottery result is “Successful hit” and “Small hit”.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach ( 90 seconds) "or" special reach (120 seconds) ", the value of the sudden success counter 223f and the value of the small hits continuous counter 223n are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the variable display. Is displayed. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each lottery result (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed on the display screen. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol jackpot”, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)”. ”Or“ special reach (120 seconds) ”, in addition to the value of the sudden consecutive number counter 223f and the value of the small hit consecutive number counter 223n in the fluctuation display, from the nth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q Each lottery result (stop type) stored in each area up to the first area may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the display is similarly performed not only when the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, but also in other cases. You may comprise so that it may perform.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the big hit effect is complete | finished, the special effect flag 223e is set to OFF, However, You may set to OFF any time within the period of a big hit effect. For example, it may be set off at the start of the jackpot presentation.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the big hit effect is complete | finished, the sudden success number counter 223f is cleared, However, You may clear at any time within the period of a big hit effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the big hit effect is complete | finished, the counter counter number 223h after small hits is cleared, However, You may clear at any time within the period of a big hit effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  In the above embodiment, the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100 in the state where the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol”, and the special effect When the middle flag 223e is on, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined as “Janken effect E”. On the other hand, even if the special effect flag 223e is off, the value of the after-hit variation counter 223h is 1 to 100 in the state where the gaming state flag 223c indicates “low probability state of special symbol”. If it is within the range, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed may be determined as “Janken Effect E”.

  Further, in the second or third embodiment, when the big hit effect ends, the small hit consecutive number counter 223n is cleared. However, it may be cleared at any time within the period of the big hit effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  In the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the unrecognizable period flag 223o is set to off. good. For example, it may be set off at the start of the jackpot presentation.

  In the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the unrecognizable period variation counter 223p is cleared. However, it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot production.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each lottery result (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed on the display screen, but out of each lot from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q as a lottery result (the stop type is “completely missed”, “front and back missed reach”) , “Reach other than front / rear reach”) may be stored so that the lottery result (stop type) is not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the winning hit and the small hit may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first place, each lottery result history storage area 223q is configured not to store a lottery result (stop type is “completely missed”, “front / rear missed reach”, “reach other than missed before / after miss”) as a lottery result. In addition, you may comprise so that it may not be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about disengagement. In other words, the winning hit and the small hit may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the “chance eye” at the end of the variation effect is a continuous notice effect. However, during the variation effect, an image different from normal or a sound different from normal is displayed. An effect such as emitting a sound may be used as a continuous notice effect. If comprised in this way, it is not necessary to change the stop type of each variable effect which performs a continuous notice effect to the "chance eyes", and the stop type instruct | indicated by the stop type command from the main control apparatus 110 is used as it is. it can. In addition, since the continuous notice effect can be performed in the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is executed, the number of executions of the continuous notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to have a sense of expectation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Moreover, when performing a continuous notice effect over a plurality of variable effects, the contents of the effects may be changed for each variable effect, or the contents of the effect may be changed only for some of the variable effects.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the 3rd symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and as a result, the 3rd symbol display device 81 The variation effect according to the variation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when the execution time of the variation effect ends, the stop type stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) for instructing stop display of a stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from the main control device 110, the scheduled execution time of the variable effect is set. You may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued even if it complete | finishes.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 prefetches the start winning. However, the audio lamp control device 113 may prefetch the start winning. In that case, if a start winning is detected in main controller 110, each value of first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1, and the pachinko at the time of winning The gaming state of the machine 10 (in the case of a big hit, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the big hit) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the sound lamp control device 113, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202a2 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a1, Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the sound lamp controller ROM 222. Further, the prefetching process (see FIG. 25) executed in the main control device 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that it can be executed in the audio lamp control device 113. With this configuration, when a pre-read command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various counter values from the pre-read command, and the lottery of the big hit lottery The result can be prefetched. As a result, the main controller 110 does not need to pre-read the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, so the control burden on the main controller 110 can be further reduced and the transition should be made based on the entrance to the first entrance 64. It can concentrate on the lottery process which draws a game state. However, since an important random number such as a jackpot random number may be found illegally, a lottery result (win / fail), stop type, and variation pattern should be included in the pre-read command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Is preferred. For example, it is possible to prevent a signal output from the main controller 110 from being stolen illegally and analyzing each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In addition, it is possible to prevent an analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from a signal output from the main controller 110.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio lamp control apparatus 113 performs the process (continuous notice determination process of FIG. 39) which determines whether a continuous notice effect is started, these processes are displayed. It may be executed at 114. In this case, a program for executing the continuous notice determination table 222d and the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area) are used so that the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 234a1). Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various memories such as the pre-read information storage area 223j, the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, the continuous notice lottery counter 223k, the continuous notice number counter 223l, and the post-notice big hit flag 223m. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a prefetch command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to transmit the command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the display control device 114 receives the prefetch command, the display control device 114 executes processing for determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect (continuous notice determination processing in FIG. 39).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or when the access ends, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing into and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided so that the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the reading or writing process. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and is made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 50). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 51) when the above is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing contents and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect has been described in which the rear image is changed and the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thereby, since the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be used in an operation check in a player, a hall-related person or a factory at the time of manufacture. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a. If it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the third symbol display device 81 and Even if the fourth notice display device is provided and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33 Or a combination thereof), the continuous notice effect mode selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot, special symbol 15R normal jackpot, special symbol miss) You may prepare two or more.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notification effects different from a variation effect was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when a continuous notification effect was performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command process (see FIG. 37) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and other stop symbol discrimination is performed. The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process. Therefore, instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command, the chance eye is set as the stop symbol. Occasionally, chances can be confirmed. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the continuous notice determination process (S1612) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 38), and the continuous notice effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image type used in the continuous preview mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, triggered by the reception of this command. Also good. Thereby, before the fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed, the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  The display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous notice effect in a subarea dedicated to the continuous notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous notice image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image data used in the continuous notice effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  Further, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. As a result, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous notice effect is the last, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous notice effect while the continuous notice effect is being performed. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily released.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display variation pattern command includes information on the execution of the continuous notice effect and the type of the continuous notice image, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each variation pattern, and each continuous A display data table corresponding to each preview image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous preview image type. You may make it set to 233d. In other words, the display data table may include a drawing content corresponding to the variation pattern and a drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Accordingly, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and an increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the image data transfer instruction corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in accordance with reception of the display variation pattern command. Thereby, since it is sufficient to prepare one transfer data table for each variation pattern, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data table.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop pattern of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, reach other than out / rear reach, complete out reach) determined by the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the audio lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variation effect that has been suspended is displayed. If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, instead of the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110, but is always a back-and-forth deviation reach, so that the player has high expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing a continuous notice effect together with all the variation effects that have been put on hold, each variation effect will be performed in an effect mode based on a lottery result performed at the start of each variation. Further, it may be configured such that the effect mode of the change effect other than the last change effect that has been put on hold is changed to the change effect. Then, the process of generating a display variation pattern command in the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1821 in FIG. 40) changes the variation pattern in accordance with the setting state of the continuous notice effect and the number of executions of the continuous notice effect. May be. If the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the change effect is displayed as it is based on the change pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, if the situation where the corresponding variation effect is, for example, the super reach variation effect and the jackpot does not appear as a result, the player's expectation However, the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effect other than the variation effect to be executed last is continuously performed as the off-change effect. The player can have a higher expectation for the fluctuating performance.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is always executed in the third symbol display device 81 when execution of the continuous notice effect is determined has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In the situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one game entrance 13 is provided on the game board 13 where a lottery lottery starts when a ball enters, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be provided in the game board 13 where entrances are detected independently and a big winning lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by 1 The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous notice effect when receiving the number-of-holding balls command, all the first entrances at that time are determined. The continuous notice effect may be executed over the fluctuating effect (holding ball) held by the mouth. Further, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of first entrances and that preferentially executes a variation effect held at one first entrance, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only when entering the first entrance. As a result, since the continuous notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance with a low priority, the continuous notice effect is provided for the change effect held at the first entry with a low priority. Is started, and when the fluctuating effect is continuously put on hold at the first entrance with a high priority, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous notice effect does not end easily.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which when the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is increased in the main controller 110, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases), a reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110. It transmits to the sound lamp control device 113. Thus, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the special symbol reserved ball number counter Each time the value (N) of 203c is updated, the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is corrected to match the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. it can.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the continuous notice effect is executed for all the variable effects that have been put on hold at that time. As described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each of the variable effects. As a result, the continuous notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous notice effect and perform an effect that does not bore the player. Can do. In this case, it is updated each time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 39) is executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is determined. It may be provided. In the continuous notice determination process, when a continuous notice effect is performed (S1716: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. In this case, the number (range) of predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. The conditions include, for example, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b when determining whether or not to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, and the variation pattern of the variable effect that is determined. The gaming state after the end of a series of continuous notice effects (special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot, special symbol 15R normal jackpot, special symbol miss), or a combination of two or more of these. Thereby, since the probability that execution of the continuous notice effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the conditions, the player can be made to pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each variation effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence is generated. Various flags such as a flag are generated. Based on the flag, the display data table and the transfer data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as a warning image is generated. Or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winnings at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown. The display means for displaying the identification information, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the production mode including the dynamic display mode of the identification information according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And a lottery result from at least the first to the fifth lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery unit. In the gaming machine provided with the first, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where it is difficult to enter the game medium is opened for the first period. And a second opening that opens the entrance for a second period shorter than the first period when the lottery result of the lottery by the opening control means and the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results. System Means, and an entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the game medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and a game medium at the entrance When the game enters, the game value granting means for giving a predetermined game value to the player, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, A first game state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability of selecting the first to third lottery results in the lottery means as a gaming state of the gaming machine; and a lottery by the lottery means. When the lottery result is the second lottery result, the second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state. Before The second gaming state setting means that is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the fourth and fifth lottery results The game state maintaining means, the lottery result by the lottery means when the lottery result becomes the third lottery result, at least the lottery result storage means for storing the fact, and the lottery result by the lottery means And a mode switching means for switching the mode selected by the mode selection unit in accordance with the contents of the lottery result storage unit when either of the first and second lottery results is reached. A gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the starting condition, the aspect of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means depends on the lottery result. Selection is performed by the aspect selection means, and control is performed by the effect control means so that the effect of the selected aspect is executed. When at least first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, When the entrance difficult to enter is opened by the first opening control means for the first period and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results, the entrance is the second opening control means. Thus, the second period shorter than the first period is opened. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means so that the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given to the game value by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, the first that has a high probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third lottery in the lottery means The second gaming state in which the probability that the result is selected is lower than the first gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery results of the lottery by the lottery means are the fourth and fifth lottery results. When the result is one of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that fact is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first and second lottery results. In any case, the mode switching unit switches the mode selected by the mode selection unit according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for the second period, so that it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result, then the player will have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the gaming machine and the details of the lottery are unknown There is a risk of becoming. According to the gaming machine A1, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and then the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results; When the lottery result of the lottery means does not become the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results. The mode to be selected can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the player is discomforted about the fact that the subsequent lottery process has become unclear, Can be made to grasp. Therefore, since the player can be made aware of the background of the lottery that has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  The gaming machine A1 includes counting means for counting the number of times that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result storage means stores the number of times counted by the counting means. The mode switching means, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, according to the number of times counted by the counting means, A gaming machine A2 that switches the mode selected by the mode selection means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the number of times the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the counted number is stored in the lottery result storage means. Then, in the mode switching unit, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit becomes either the first or the second lottery result, the mode selection unit selects according to the number counted by the counting unit. The mode is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means. Become. Thereby, it becomes easy for a game medium to enter the entrance, and a predetermined game value is easily given. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change and the game medium does not easily enter the entrance. Therefore, the third lottery result is more advantageous for the player than the fourth lottery result. According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the lottery result that is difficult to recognize, the player can be made aware of the number of times the third lottery result is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the details of the lottery that has become unknown. Therefore, since the discomfort of the player can be further reduced, the player can be more continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  The display means for displaying the identification information, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the production mode including the dynamic display mode of the identification information according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And a lottery result from at least the first to the fifth lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery unit. In the gaming machine provided with the first, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where it is difficult to enter the game medium is opened for the first period. And a second opening that opens the entrance for a second period shorter than the first period when the lottery result of the lottery by the opening control means and the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results. System Means, and an entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the game medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and a game medium at the entrance When the game enters, the game value granting means for giving a predetermined game value to the player, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, A first game state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability of selecting the first to third lottery results in the lottery means as a gaming state of the gaming machine; and a lottery by the lottery means. When the lottery result is the second lottery result, the second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state. Before The second gaming state setting means that is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the fourth and fifth lottery results The game state maintaining means, the lottery result by the lottery means when the lottery result becomes the third lottery result, at least the lottery result storage means for storing the fact, and the lottery result by the lottery means And a mode switching means for switching the mode selected by the mode selection unit in accordance with the contents of the lottery result storage unit when either of the first and second lottery results is reached. A gaming machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the aspect of production including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means depends on the lottery result. Selection is performed by the aspect selection means, and control is performed by the effect control means so that the effect of the selected aspect is executed. When at least first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, When the entrance difficult to enter is opened by the first opening control means for the first period and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results, the entrance is the second opening control means. Thus, the second period shorter than the first period is opened. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means so that the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given to the game value by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, the first that has a high probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third lottery in the lottery means The second gaming state in which the probability that the result is selected is lower than the first gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery results of the lottery by the lottery means are the fourth and fifth lottery results. When the result is one of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that fact is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first and second lottery results. In any case, the mode switching unit switches the mode selected by the mode selection unit according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for the second period, so that it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result, then the player will have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the gaming machine and the details of the lottery are unknown There is a risk of becoming. According to the gaming machine B1, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and then the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results; When the lottery result of the lottery means does not become the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results. The mode to be selected can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the player is discomforted about the fact that the subsequent lottery process has become unclear, Can be made to grasp. Therefore, since the player can be made aware of the background of the lottery that has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  Number of lotteries made after the lottery result of the lottery means among the lotteries made in the lottery means in the gaming machine B1 and any of the gaming machines A1 to A2 becomes the fourth lottery result Counting means, and the lottery result storage means stores the number of times counted by the counting means, and the mode switching means is characterized in that the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first or If any of the second lottery results is reached, whether the number counted by the counting means is 1 or more and a predetermined number or less, and whether the gaming machine is in the second gaming state A determination means for determining, wherein when the determination means determines that the number of times is 1 or more and a predetermined number or less and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state, The mode selected by the selection unit is switched to a mode different from the mode selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit and the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. This is a gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, among the lotteries made by the lottery means, the number of lotteries made after the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result is counted by the counting means. Is stored in the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery means is either the first or second lottery result, the number counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine Is determined in accordance with the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the mode selected by the mode switching means is determined by the determining means whether or not is in the second gaming state, and The mode is switched to a mode different from the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means. Become. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change. Therefore, the first or second lottery result is not easily selected in the lottery means. Therefore, after the fourth lottery result is reached, the first or second lottery result is selected within a predetermined number of times without changing to the third lottery result and in the second gaming state. The probability is low. According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the lottery result that was difficult to recognize, the first or second lottery result was selected in a state where the probability of selection of the first or second lottery result was considerably low. The player can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the details of the lottery that has become unknown. In addition, it is possible to give the player a surprise that the first or second lottery result has been selected in a very low probability and a satisfaction that the player has been lucky. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have more willingness to participate in the game.

  The display means for displaying the identification information, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the production mode including the dynamic display mode of the identification information according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And a lottery result from at least the first to the fifth lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery unit. In the gaming machine provided with the first, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where it is difficult to enter the game medium is opened for the first period. And a second opening that opens the entrance for a second period shorter than the first period when the lottery result of the lottery by the opening control means and the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results. System Means, and an entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the game medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and a game medium at the entrance When the game enters, the game value granting means for giving a predetermined game value to the player, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, A first game state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability of selecting the first to third lottery results in the lottery means as a gaming state of the gaming machine; and a lottery by the lottery means. When the lottery result is the second lottery result, the second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state. Before The second gaming state setting means that is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is one of the fourth and fifth lottery results The game state maintaining means, the lottery result by the lottery means when the lottery result becomes the third lottery result, at least the lottery result storage means for storing the fact, and the lottery result by the lottery means And a mode switching means for switching the mode selected by the mode selection unit in accordance with the contents of the lottery result storage unit when either of the first and second lottery results is reached. A gaming machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the aspect of the effect including the dynamic display aspect of the identification information displayed on the display means depends on the lottery result. Selection is performed by the aspect selection means, and control is performed by the effect control means so that the effect of the selected aspect is executed. When at least first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results, When the entrance difficult to enter is opened by the first opening control means for the first period and the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results, the entrance is the second opening control means. Thus, the second period shorter than the first period is opened. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means so that the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given to the game value by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, the first that has a high probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third lottery in the lottery means The second gaming state in which the probability that the result is selected is lower than the first gaming state is set by the second gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery results of the lottery by the lottery means are the fourth and fifth lottery results. When the result is one of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that fact is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first and second lottery results. In any case, the mode switching unit switches the mode selected by the mode selection unit according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit. When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for the second period, so that it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result, then the player will have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the gaming machine and the details of the lottery are unknown There is a risk of becoming. According to the gaming machine C1, the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and then the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results; When the lottery result of the lottery means does not become the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery means becomes one of the first and second lottery results. The mode to be selected can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the player is discomforted about the fact that the subsequent lottery process has become unclear, Can be made to grasp. Therefore, since the player can be made aware of the background of the lottery that has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player's willingness to participate in a game falls, a player can be continued to have the willingness to participate in a game.

  A first counting means for counting the number of times that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result in any of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines A1 to A2, Second lottery means for counting the number of times that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result, and the lottery result storage means includes the number of times counted by the first counter means, The number of times counted by the second counting means is stored, and the mode switching means, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the mode selected by the mode selection unit is switched according to the number of times counted by the first counting unit and the number of times counted by the second counting unit.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the number of times the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result is counted by the first counting means, and the number of times the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result. Is counted by the second counting means. The number of times counted by the first counting means and the number of times counted by the second counting means are stored in the lottery result storage means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes either the first or the second lottery result, the number of times counted by the first counting means by the mode switching means and the count by the second counting means The mode selected by the mode selection means is switched in accordance with the number of times of being performed. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means. Become. Thereby, it becomes easy for a game medium to enter the entrance, and a predetermined game value is easily given. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change and the game medium does not easily enter the entrance. Therefore, the third lottery result is more advantageous for the player than the fourth lottery result. According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the lottery result that is difficult to recognize, the number of times the third lottery result is advantageous to the player and the number of times the fourth lottery result is not advantageous to the player are The player can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the details of the lottery that has become unknown. Therefore, since the discomfort of the player can be further reduced, the player can be more continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C2, gaming machines B1 to B2, and gaming machines A1 to A2, the lottery result storage means is that the lottery result of the lottery means is the third lottery result and The lottery result information indicating the lottery result is stored in association with the lottery order when the result becomes one of the lottery results, and the mode switching means is the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means. In accordance with each lottery result information stored in the lottery result storage means and the order associated with the lottery result information, A gaming machine C3 that switches the mode selected by the mode selection means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes either the third lottery result or the fourth lottery result, the lottery result information indicating the lottery result is the lottery result. The lottery result storage means stores the information in association with the order. And when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes either the first or the second lottery result, each lottery result information stored in the lottery result storage means by the mode switching means, and the lottery result The mode selected by the mode selection unit is switched according to the order associated with the information. Therefore, in addition to the lottery result that is difficult to recognize, the player is made aware of the order of the third lottery result that is advantageous to the player and the order that is the fourth lottery result that is not advantageous to the player. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand in more detail the details of the lottery that has become unknown. Therefore, since the discomfort of the player can be further reduced, the player can be further encouraged to participate in the game.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine D1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine D2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine D3 that is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a Special winning entrance (entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit 113 Audio lamp control unit 114 Display control unit 223h Counter change number after small hits (lottery result storage means, counting means)
S415: No, S417: No, S1005 Entrance maintenance means S415: No, S417: No, S1207: No Game state maintenance means S416, S1005, S1102, S1103 First release control means S418, S1005, S1202, S1203 Second release Control means S502 to S505 Lottery means S508, S513, S515 Aspect selection means S516, S1001, S1402, S1412, S1414, S2301 to S2307 Production control means S1002 Game value assigning means S1112, S1113, S1207, S1208 First game state setting means S1112 , S1114 Second game state setting means S1805, S1806 Determination means S1808 to S1810, S1820 Mode switching means

Claims (2)

The display means for displaying the identification information, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the production mode including the dynamic display mode of the identification information according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And a lottery result from at least the first to the fifth lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery unit. In a gaming machine provided with
First opening control means for opening the entrance where it is difficult to enter the game medium for a first period when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and second lottery results;
Second opening control means for opening the entrance for a second period shorter than the first period when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the third and fourth lottery results;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, the entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the game medium is difficult to enter,
A game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to a player when a game medium enters the entrance;
If the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the first and third lottery results, the first lottery result from the first to the third is highly likely to be selected in the lottery by the lottery means. First gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state as the gaming state of the gaming machine;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second lottery result, the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is higher than that of the first gaming state. A second gaming state setting means for setting a low second gaming state as the gaming state of the gaming machine;
A game state maintaining means for maintaining the gaming state of the gaming machine when the lottery result of the lottery means is one of the fourth and fifth lottery results;
When the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, the lottery result storage means for storing at least that effect;
A mode in which the mode selected by the mode selection unit is switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage unit when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit is one of the first and second lottery results. A gaming machine comprising switching means. Among the lotteries made in the lottery means, the counter has a counting means for counting the number of lotteries made after the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result,
The lottery result storage means
Storing the number of times counted by the counting means;
The aspect switching means includes
When the lottery result of the lottery means is either the first or second lottery result, the number counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the gaming machine Determining means for determining whether the state is the second gaming state;
A mode selected by the mode selection unit when the determination unit determines that the number of times is 1 or more and a predetermined number or less and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state. The aspect selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means and the aspect switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means are switched to another aspect. Game machines.